2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
21_WL_OM_EN_USC
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right
to make changes in design and specifications, andor make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used
in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
NavigationUconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 95
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 121
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................206
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 237
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................297
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 322
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................386
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................392
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................396
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 16
Key Fob .............................................................16
SENTRY KEY .......................................................... 19
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 20
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition .............................20
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 21
How To Use Remote Start................................22
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................23
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................23
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................24
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................24
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 24
To Arm The System ..........................................24
To Disarm The System .....................................25
Rearming Of The System .................................25
Security System Manual Override...................25
Tamper Alert .....................................................25
DOORS.....................................................................25
Manual Door Locks ..........................................25
Power Door Locks ...........................................26
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ..............27
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................29
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped..............30
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .......................................................30
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................30
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped .......................................................30
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped........................................................31
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............31
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED ..............................................32
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................32
Basic Voice Commands ...................................32
Get Started .......................................................32
Additional Information .....................................33
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....................................33
Programming The Memory Feature ................34
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory .............................................................34
Memory Position Recall ...................................34
SEATS ..................................................................... 35
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................35
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................36
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped ......................................................40
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
If Equipped .......................................................42
Power Seatback Massage — If Equipped .......43
Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................44
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................45
Head Restraints ...............................................46
MIRRORS ............................................................... 49
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................49
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................50
Outside Mirrors ................................................50
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................51
Power Mirrors ...................................................51
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors —
If Equipped .......................................................52
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................52
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped .......................................................52
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 52
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.......................................................53
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............53
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................53
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................54
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ......................................55
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................55
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........55
Security .............................................................56
Troubleshooting Tips........................................56
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 57
Headlight Switch ..............................................57
Multifunction Lever ..........................................58
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .......................................................58
High/Low Beam Switch....................................58
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped.............58
Flash-To-Pass....................................................59
Automatic Headlights ......................................59
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................59
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers ......59
Headlight Illumination On Approach...............60
Headlight Delay ................................................60
Lights-On Reminder .........................................60
Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................61
Turn Signals......................................................61
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................61
Automatic Headlight Leveling — If Equipped..61
Battery Saver....................................................61
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................62
Courtesy Lights.................................................62
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..............63
Windshield Wiper Operation............................63
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............65
Rear Wiper And Washer ..................................66
Windshield Wiper De-Icer —
If Equipped .......................................................66
CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................66
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................67
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............73
Climate Voice Recognition...............................74
Operating Tips .................................................74
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 76
Storage .............................................................76
Sun Screens — If Equipped .............................77
USB/AUX Control..............................................78
Electrical Power Outlets...................................79
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................81
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............81
WINDOWS ............................................................. 82
Power Window Controls...................................82
Wind Buffeting .................................................84
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 84
Single Pane Power Sunroof —
If Equipped ......................................................84
Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .......86
HOOD....................................................................... 88
Opening The Hood ...........................................88
Closing The Hood .............................................89
LIFTGATE................................................................. 89
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................89
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................90
Adjustable Power Liftgate Height....................90
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .................91
Cargo Area Features ........................................92
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 93
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................96
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 98
Location And Controls......................................98
Display And Messages .................................. 100
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................... 101
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 102
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................... 107
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................108
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 109
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 112
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 115
Green Indicator Lights................................... 116
White Indicator Lights ................................... 117
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 118
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 118
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......118
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 119
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................................................119
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................... 121
Automatic Transmission ............................... 121
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...................... 121
Normal Starting ............................................. 122
AutoPark ........................................................ 122
If Engine Fails To Start.................................. 124
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) .......................................................... 124
After Starting ................................................. 124
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........ 124
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 125
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 125
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 125
Auto Park Brake ............................................ 127
SafeHold ........................................................ 127
Hold ‘N Go— If Equipped .............................. 128
Brake Maintenance Mode............................ 128
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................. 129
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 130
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................................................... 130
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 130
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 135
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION......................136
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped............................ 136
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped............................ 136
Shift Positions ............................................... 137
Shifting Procedures....................................... 137
Quadra-Trac II System —
If Equipped .................................................... 138
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED .......................138
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...................... 138
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 139
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............................139
Description .................................................... 139
Air Suspension Modes.................................. 141
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 142
Operation....................................................... 142
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................143
POWER STEERING...............................................143
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............144
Autostop Mode .............................................. 144
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 144
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .............................................................. 145
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 145
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 145
System Malfunction ...................................... 145
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................146
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 146
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................156
Activation/Deactivation ................................ 156
Traffic Sign Assist Modes.............................. 156
Indications On The Display ........................... 156
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................158
Operation ....................................................... 158
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off ........ 158
Indications On The Display ........................... 160
System Status................................................ 160
System Operation/Limitations ..................... 161
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................... 161
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 162
ParkSense Display ........................................ 162
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 165
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 165
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System ........................................................... 165
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 166
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 166
Side Distance Warning System .................... 167
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................... 169
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System............................. 170
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation.................................... 171
Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 173
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 174
Active Lane Management Operation ........... 174
Turning Active Lane Management On
Or Off.............................................................. 175
Active Lane Management Warning
Message ........................................................ 175
Changing Active Lane Management
Status............................................................. 177
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............177
Zoom View ..................................................... 179
Viewing At Speed........................................... 179
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................179
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...................181
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................181
Detection Range ........................................... 183
Service The Night Vision System.................. 184
Night Vision System Limitations................... 184
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................184
Zoom View ..................................................... 187
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................187
VEHICLE LOADING...............................................188
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......... 188
Payload .......................................................... 188
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 188
Tire Size ......................................................... 189
Rim Size......................................................... 189
Inflation Pressure.......................................... 189
Curb Weight................................................... 189
Loading .......................................................... 189
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TRAILER TOWING ................................................189
Common Towing Definitions......................... 190
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 192
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) ................................. 193
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..................................................... 194
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 194
Towing Requirements .................................. 195
Towing Tips ................................................... 198
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................198
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle............................................................ 198
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 199
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case without
4WD LOW Range) Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................................................... 200
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II with
4WD LOW Range ........................................... 200
DRIVING TIPS ......................................................203
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 203
Off-Road Driving Tips..................................... 203
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS..........................................206
CYBERSECURITY .................................................206
UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................ 207
Customer Programmable Features ............. 207
3RD PARTY APPS ............................................... 230
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED.................... 232
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 232
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 233
Accessory Gauges ........................................ 233
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 233
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................... 234
Suspension ................................................... 234
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............. 235
Radio Operation ............................................ 235
Media Mode................................................... 235
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ..... 235
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 235
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 237
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 237
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) —
If Equipped..................................................... 238
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ................ 239
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 239
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 246
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)........................ 246
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation....................................................... 250
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 253
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...................258
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 258
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 259
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 259
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 266
Child Restraints............................................. 280
SAFETY TIPS.........................................................293
Transporting Passengers.............................. 293
Transporting Pets.......................................... 293
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 293
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 295
Exhaust Gas .................................................. 295
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 296
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................297
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED .......297
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................301
Preparations For Jacking.............................. 301
Jack Location................................................. 302
Spare Tire Stowage....................................... 303
Spare Tire Removal....................................... 303
Jacking Instructions ..................................... 305
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
JUMP STARTING ..................................................309
Preparations For Jump Start......................... 310
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 310
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ..312
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................313
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................313
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................315
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................316
Rear Wheel Drive Models ............................. 317
All Wheel Drive Models ................................. 318
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped..................................................... 318
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................... 319
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................321
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................321
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................322
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 323
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................326
3.6L Engine.................................................... 326
5.7L Engine.................................................... 327
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 327
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 328
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 328
Pressure Washing ......................................... 329
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 329
Engine Oil....................................................... 329
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 330
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 330
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 331
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 333
Body Lubrication ........................................... 334
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 334
Exhaust System ............................................ 337
Cooling System.............................................. 338
Brake System ............................................... 341
Automatic Transmission ............................... 342
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 343
Transfer Case ............................................... 344
Fuses.............................................................. 344
Bulb Replacement......................................... 364
TIRES..................................................................... 364
Tire Safety Information ................................. 364
Tires — General Information......................... 371
Tire Types....................................................... 375
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 376
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 378
Snow Traction Devices.................................. 379
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 381
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................... 381
Treadwear...................................................... 381
Traction Grades............................................. 382
Temperature Grades..................................... 382
STORING THE VEHICLE....................................... 382
BODYWORK..........................................................383
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 383
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 383
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 383
INTERIORS ...........................................................384
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 384
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 384
Leather Surfaces........................................... 385
Glass Surfaces ............................................. 385
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........386
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................386
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..386
Torque Specifications ................................... 386
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................387
3.6L Engine .................................................. 387
5.7L Engine ................................................... 387
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 388
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 388
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................... 388
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................... 388
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...... 389
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................... 389
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 389
FLUID CAPACITIES...............................................390
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................390
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.................391
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................392
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 392
Prepare A List ................................................ 392
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 392
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 392
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 392
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 392
Mexico............................................................ 393
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 393
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).................... 393
Service Contract ........................................... 393
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................394
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................394
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................394
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 394
In Canada ...................................................... 394
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................394
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................395
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
The all-new Jeep® Grand Cherokee L continues to build on its proud legacy as the most celebrated SUV ever, while raising the bar in luxury and
performance. With legendary 4x4 capability, this vehicle breaks new ground in exceptional performance, comfort, and functionality. We have improved
on-road refinement and premium styling and craftsmanship inside and out. With an unsurpassed blend of refined sophistication, dynamic performance,
cutting edge technologies and levels of elegance, the new Jeep® Grand Cherokee L carries an attractive presence and capability that is uncommon in
its class, unquestionably Jeep® brand, and unmistakably world class.
The Grand Cherokee L is a specialized utility vehicle and can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles.
It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe
conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 203.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations,
tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
1
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 108.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 109
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 109
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 110
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 110
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 110
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 110
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 110
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 111
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 111
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
Ú page 111
Red Warning Lights
1
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
Ú page 111
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 111
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 111
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 111
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 112
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 112
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 112
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 112
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 113
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 113
Active Lane Management Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 113
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light
Ú page 113
Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
Ú page 113
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 113
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 114
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 114
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Yellow Warning Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 114
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 115
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Yellow Warning Lights
1
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 116
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 116
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Yellow Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Active Lane Management Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Night Vision Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 117
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 117
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 117
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 117
Green Indicator Lights
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
Ú page 117
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 117
Active Lane Management Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 118
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 118
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 118
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 118
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 118
1
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped),
Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power
liftgate (if equipped) operation. The key fob
allows you to lock or unlock all doors and
liftgate, as well as activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains an emergency key, which is stored in
the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be found if
it is placed within 15 cm (150 mm) of the pad
Ú page 81.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change
positions with the push of a button, the key fob
may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low
key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
For more information on ignition positions, see
Ú page 20
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates after a key fob
button is pushed, then the key fob battery
requires replacement Ú page 395.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Power Liftgate
6 — Panic
7 — Emergency Key
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob,
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and the Vehicle Security
system will arm (if equipped).
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate
is open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Using The Key Fob To Open Vehicle
Windows — If Equipped
From outside of the vehicle, push and release
the unlock button on the key fob, and within five
seconds push and hold the unlock button for up
to seven seconds. All vehicle door windows will
open.
NOTE:
This feature is enabled through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 207.
Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear
auto up/down windows.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on
the key fob above the top row buttons blinks
when a button is pressed. The coin battery
should last a minimum of three years with
normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by pushing
the emergency key release button (1) on
the side of the key fob, and pulling the
emergency key out with the other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removed
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap
on the left side between the housing and
the back cover of the key fob. Use a #2 flat
blade screw driver, or coin, to pry apart the
two halves of the key fob. Make sure not to
damage the seal during removal.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the
key fob, which is positioned further to the
edge than the left side gap. Pry open the
right side, and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back
toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar tool
into the battery removal pocket to pry the
battery out.
Battery Removal Pocket
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign
on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
top edge of the back cover with the top of
the fob, and press the edges into the
interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell
battery is swallowed, it can cause severe
internal burns in just two hours and can
lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does
not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the OFF position.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on
for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 395.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ON/RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a
push of the ignition button, and the instrument
cluster display message “Key Fob Not
Detected” is being displayed, the key fob may
have a low or depleted battery. In this situation,
a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the emergency key) against
the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
For more information on the engine starting
procedure, see Ú page 121.
When opening the driver's door and the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition ON”
will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 395.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go
Ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur
when Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight
Illumination On Approach” is enabled within
Uconnect Settings.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security Light is flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if selected in
the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 207. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The climate controls will automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient
temperature. This will occur until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
For more information on ATC and climate
control settings Ú page 66.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control setting
will change, and exit automatic operation, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous
operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue
Ú page 207.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the Vehicle Security system is armed,
interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release handle are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
Make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 27.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the lower right
portion of the instrument cluster display) will
begin to flash every two seconds until it is
disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock
button on the interior door panel, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash rapidly for about
15 seconds once the door is closed, then slow
down to every two seconds.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 27.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
the door key cylinder when the alarm is
armed will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the
liftgate button on the key fob. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door from the inside, the alarm will
sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the liftgate, the Vehicle Security
system is disarmed and the rest of the
vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within
Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the emergency lock lever
Ú page 25.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound
three times and the exterior lights will blink
three times when you disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The front doors can be manually unlocked with
a single pull of the inside door handle. The
driver’s door can also be manually unlocked by
inserting the emergency key into the lock
cylinder on the outside door handle.
The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a
double pull of the inside door handle.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Each door can be manually locked by inserting
the emergency key into the emergency lock
lever and sliding the lever upward. The
emergency lock lever is located on the door
latch face of each door.
Emergency Lock Lever (Driver’s Door Shown)
NOTE:
The emergency lock lever is only accessible
when the door is open.
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock buttons are located on
each front door panel. Push the lock button to
lock all doors and liftgate, or the unlock button
to unlock all doors and liftgate.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in
the lock button will illuminate.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
On the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key is inside.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock button is pushed while the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks
Power door lock buttons are located on each
rear door trim panel. Push the lock button to
lock all doors and liftgate, and the unlock
button to unlock all doors and liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
If equipped, the rear doors will also have
Passive Entry capabilities.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob's wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
parking lights, door handle pocket lights [if
equipped]) for whichever time duration is set
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive
Entry unlock also initiates two flashes of the
turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock and lock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
The doors may lock and unlock when water is
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if
the key fob is located outside of the vehicle
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp
and one flash of turn signal lights. These
settings can be programmed on/off within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and will rearm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the front passenger door handle (or a
rear handle when equipped with four-door
Passive Entry) will unlock all doors and the
liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger (or a rear door when equipped
with four door Passive Entry) door handle is
grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are five situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in
pre-arm or armed status and the liftgate tran-
sitions from opened to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the
emergency lock lever.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle, touch the lock icon on the door handle
to lock all four doors and liftgate.
Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the
lock icon. This could unlock the door(s).
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After touching the door handle lock icon, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors using any Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect Settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release button. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release button for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the
electronic liftgate handle and lift for Manual
Liftgate vehicles.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate door
handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate Ú page 395.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 207.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks engaged (locked).
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering
column.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
saved positions Ú page 33.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the
radio screen, and within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
— IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. This section provides
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button , and after the beep, say
a command. You can also say the system
“Wake Up” word and then say a command:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system. You can also
use the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate
voice recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be
set through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button or say the “Wake Up”
word, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
You can also interrupt the help message or
system prompts by speaking. This feature is
called “barge-in” and can be set through the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 395.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped,
also the front passenger to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver’s Side
Seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped)
Seat Position
The memory settings switches are located on
the front door panels, next to the door handle,
and consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Buttons
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either driver’s side
memory position 1 or 2.
Front passenger memory settings cannot be
linked to a key fob.
1 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, , Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone
Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push To Access Home Mode On The
Touchscreen
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call
Currently In Progress
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power
tilt/telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The
instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be below 5 mph
(8 km/h) to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two saved driver’s side memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory
profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s
side memory settings by pushing the set (S)
button, and within 10 seconds, pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if
the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
To recall a memory settings profile using the
memory switches, push memory button (1) or
(2) on the memory switch.
To recall the driver’s side memory settings
using the key fob, push the unlock button on
the key fob linked to memory position 1 or 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
When a recall is canceled, the seat and power
tilt/telescopic steering column (if equipped) will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
(Continued)
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
system of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The passenger seat can
be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar
located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position
and release the lever. To return the seatback to
its normal position, lean forward and lift the
lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Recline Lever
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply unfolding the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/REAR-
WARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front
of the seat near the floor and release it when
the seat is at the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE ADJUST-
MENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position
and release the lever. To return the seatback to
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
its normal position, lean forward and lift the
lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to position the front seat to its mid-track
position. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the
recline lever located on the outboard side of the
seat, and let the seatback fold forward
automatically.
Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into
its original position and lock it into place.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
The second row seats can tip forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the outboard side of the seatback, then tip and
slide the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever Location
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Access To Third Row Seats
To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold
the seatback upright until it locks and push the
seat rearward until the track locks.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front
of the seat near the floor and release it when
the seat is at the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
ADJUSTMENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position
and release the lever. To return the seatback to
its normal position, lean forward and lift the
lever. To ensure the seatback is latched, use
body pressure to lean forward and rearward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
SEATS
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to
carry cargo.
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the
outboard side of each second row seat, and
guide the seatback down into the folded
position.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Folded Flat
To Raise The Rear Seats
Fold the seatbacks upward to their original
position, and lock them into place.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
The second row seats can tip forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the outboard side of the seatback, then tip and
slide the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever Location
Access To Third Row Seats
To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold
the seatback upright until it locks and push the
seat rearward until the track locks.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat,
pull on the release handle located on the back
of the seat and lower the seat using the pull
strap located next to the release handle.
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full
upright position or folded flat when folding the
third row seats.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Release Handles
Third Row Folded
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using
the strap located on the back of the seat.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with 12-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. There are three
switches that control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Cushion Extender Switch
2 — Seat Switch
3 — Seatback And Bolster Adjustment Switch
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
(Continued)
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment
The front driver and passenger seatback
bolsters can be extended outward, or retracted
inward by pushing the bolster adjustment
button located in the center of the seatback
switch.
Push the top of the button to extend the
bolsters, or push the bottom of the button to
retract the bolsters.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
Cushion Extender
The cushion can be extended forward a few
inches (centimeters) to increase thigh support.
Push the cushion extender switch forward or
rearward to extend or retract the cushion.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING!
1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters
2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 33.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled within the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt
will not be positioned properly on the occu-
pant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks — If
Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located
in the right rear trim panel inside the cargo area,
as part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the
power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt
webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or
opening the seat. When the seat is in the
desired position, remove the webbing from the
stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave
the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to
restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
The head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power
folding positions for the second and third row
seats. The second row seats can be folded
using these switches, while the third row can be
folded or unfolded.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
There are also power folding switches for the
third row seats located on the C-pillar (just
behind the rear doors on the trim panels).
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)
POWER SEATBACK MASSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbacks
may be equipped with power massage.
The massage feature can be turned on/off
through the massage button located on the
door panel near the handle, or through the
Comfort screen on the radio.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Door Panel Massage Button
Once activated by either method, the massage
controls screen will display on the radio screen,
and “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level” can
be selected for the activated seat.
There are four intensity levels and five massage
types that can be selected.
Intensity Levels:
High
Med
Low
Off
Massage Types:
Waterfall
Lower Back
Extend
Low Extend
Shoulder
The selected settings will save in the system’s
memory when turned off, and will resume the
next time the system is turned on.
NOTE:
Power seatback massage is only available with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen or within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Indicator lights in each switch
illuminate indicating the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat switch once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat switch a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
occupant cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
Front Ventilated Seats
The ventilated seats control buttons are located
on the center stack below the radio screen or
within the Uconnect system. The fans operate at
three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may be
equipped with ventilated seats. The rear
ventilated seat control switches are located on
the rear of the center console and allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and
LO. Push the ventilated seat switches to toggle
through the speeds, or to turn the feature off.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are two ventilated seat switches:
Press the ventilated seat switch once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat switch a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat switch a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Upright Position
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs
If the second row is equipped with Captain’s
chairs, the head restraints are not adjustable or
removable. They automatically fold forward
when the seatback is folded, and do not return
to their normal position when the seatback is
raised. After returning the seatback to its
upright position after a folding operation, raise
the head restraint until it locks in place.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat,
the head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable or removable. They
automatically fold forward when the seatback is
folded, and do not return to their normal
position when the seatback is raised. After
returning the seatback to its upright position
after a folding operation, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The center head restraint has one adjustment
position, and can be adjusted up or down when
the seat is occupied. Pull up on the head
restraint to raise it. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The center head restraint is not removable.
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 258.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are not adjustable
or removable, but can be folded for improved
visibility when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and
there are no occupants in the seats.
Press the “Headrest Fold” button
within the Controls menu of the
Uconnect system to power fold the
third row head restraints.
The head restraints will also automatically fold
when the seatbacks are folded forward using
the release handles on the backs of the seats
from the cargo area.
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (small control
forward toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or off through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
road behind while driving.
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Rearview Mirror mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
Digital Rearview Mirror
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the menu button next to the on/off
control/toggle to access the following mirror
options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, push the on/off forward
toward the windshield to return the mirror to the
regular Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during night time driving in low light applica-
tions due to low ambient light levels. In the
event that it provides the user with less than
expected vision, the mirror can be reverted to
a normal reflective electrochromatic mirror
by pushing the control/toggle forward in the
vehicle and putting the mirror into Automatic
Dimming Mirror mode.
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup camera and digital
rearview mirror cameras (if equipped) are
also washed. For more information, see
Ú page 66.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will
turn on automatically.
Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional
sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while
the sun visor is against the windshield for addi-
tional sun blockage through the front of the
vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on
the driver's side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to
the mirror you want to adjust (L) or (R). Then
push the switch in the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob
to the neutral position to prevent accidental
movements.
Power Folding
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power
Folding Mirror function, rotate the control
switch to the power folding position. Rotating
the control to the left, right, or neutral position
will return the mirrors to the driving position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved
again during door mirror folding (from closed to
open position and vice versa), the movement
direction is reversed.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by turning the switch (this may
require multiple switch activations to
synchronize the driver and passenger mirror).
This resets them to their normal position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of
the Driver Memory Settings (if equipped)
Ú page 33.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING MIRRORS
— I
F EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207, the exterior mirrors will
automatically fold when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position while all doors are still closed
and locked.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically,
they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the
power folding mirror switch on the driver’s door
panel, they will not automatically unfold.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 66.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors
will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button Ú page 395.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF)
signal, it is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the
HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the
device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” in this section for the
procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device, as it follows the same
procedure. Be sure to determine if the device
has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before
beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner. The
procedure may need to be performed multiple
times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position with
the engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle
is outside of your garage, or that the garage
door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator
flashes. Note that all channels will be erased.
Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security system is
active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a
headlight switch without the OFF position. In
order to turn the exterior lights off, the headlight
switch must be rotated to AUTO position.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise from the parking
lights and instrument panel lights position to
the AUTO position for automatic headlights.
Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel
lights operation.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ON/RUN
position, or the parking brake is engaged. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night
time driving.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlight system
can be turned on or off by selecting or dese-
lecting “Auto High Beam” within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 207.
The headlight switch must also be turned to
the AUTO position after Automatic High
Beams is enabled within Uconnect Settings
for the feature to activate.
Automatic High Beams will only activate
when the vehicle speed is above 22 mph
(35 km/h).
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlight Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90
seconds within the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY WITH
W
IPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the vehicle will monitor outside bright-
ness and decide if the instrument panel needs
to be dimmed or not Ú page 62.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
A
PPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door
handle pocket lights (if equipped), and interior
lights will illuminate when the unlock button on
the key fob is pushed as the operator is
approaching the vehicle. This feature can be
turned on/off, and the length of time the
headlights stay on can be programmed for up to
90 seconds within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207.
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
This feature is enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system, and is activated when the
operator approaches the driver’s door,
passenger’s door, or liftgate with a valid key fob
on their person. Some exterior and interior
lights will illuminate in order to provide an
increased sense of welcome and security as the
operator approaches the vehicle in the dark.
“Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be
selected and set to a time value other than zero
within Uconnect Settings for Proximity Wake-Up
to activate.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this
feature to activate, as long as the ignition is in
the OFF position, or during a Remote Start
event. It will not activate if the doors are locked
and the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the
following conditions:
After numerous consecutive activations, in
order to conserve the vehicle’s battery
After the vehicle’s engine has been off for
several days
Headlight Animation — If Equipped
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
turned on, and set to a time value above zero,
the exterior lights illuminate in a theatrical
manner during approach to the vehicle. This
feature is activated in the following situations:
Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated
Remote Start is activated
The unlock button on the key fob is pushed
NOTE:
For Headlight Animation to activate with
Remote Start or with the push of the unlock
button, “Greeting Lights” must also be selected
within the Uconnect system.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with
a headlight delay that will leave the headlights
on for approximately 90 seconds. This delay is
initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and
then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
note:
The headlight delay time is programmable
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights, and
push the fog light button on the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Button
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate when
the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the button is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When
activated, a light incorporated in the front fog
light will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal
indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast cluster turn indicator flash
rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from
interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers.
Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the
height of the headlight beam in reaction to
changes in vehicle pitch.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and
any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the
overhead console Dome On switch is left on for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or the Dome ON
button is pushed on the overhead console. If
your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the
key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn
on. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, pressing the Dome Defeat button on the
overhead console will cause all of the interior
lights to turn off. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay
open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console lights can also be
operated individually as reading lights by
pushing the corresponding buttons.
Courtesy Lights
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
Located above the rear passenger seating in
both second and third rows, along the trim, are
courtesy/reading lights. The courtesy lights turn
on when a door or the liftgate is opened. The
lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push the reading light button to turn
these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push
the reading light button a second time to turn
each light off.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent
to the headlight switch located on the left side
of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument cluster lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the
instrument panel and doors. The ambient
lighting may be color customizable Ú page 63.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Ambient Light
4 — Dome ON Button
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Ambient lighting in the second and third row
seating areas may not be equipped in the
vehicle.
The dimming of the touchscreen is program-
mable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If Equipped
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of
the vehicle can be selected within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 207. Brightness is adjusted
using the ambient light dimmer control on the
headlight switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two
zones inside of the vehicle:
Zone 1:
Instrument panel decorative ambient
lights
Door panel decorative ambient lights
Zone 2:
Front seat footwell areas below the
instrument panel
Lighting below the second row seats
Map pocket lighting on all four door
panels
These areas can be set to different colors, or if
the SYNC button is selected within the settings
menu, all colored lights will be set to the same
color automatically.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle
will remain white, and the ambient light dimmer
control switch will adjust all ambient lighting at
the same time.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever.
Multifunction Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch
at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
operation. To turn the windshield wipers off,
rotate the switch within the lever all the way
down to OFF.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable.
Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the
switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36
seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward
toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while
on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several cycles,
then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the front window washer feature is acti-
vated, all of the front cameras (if equipped)
on the vehicle will be washed as well.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers
necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Operation
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 334.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper
lever to one of the four detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from
the windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity
position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper
sensitivity position 4 is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low, high, or
OFF position. Only in one of the intermittent
positions.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried saltwater is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce rain sensor perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
The Rain Sensing system has protective
features for the wiper blades and arms. It will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, when the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside temperature rises above freezing.
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, when the
transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL
position and the vehicle speed is less than
3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on
the windshield wiper lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h)
or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once
the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it
has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever
forward activates the rear window
washer. If the lever is pushed while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
When the rear window washer is activated, the
rear backup camera and digital rearview mirror
cameras (if equipped) are also washed.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated
under the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally in the case of a cold weather manual
start with full front defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally when the rear defrost is turned on and
when the ambient temperature is below
33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation —
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation
will continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display Temperature
Controls
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display Temperature
Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release to change the
current setting. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. Pressing
other setting buttons will also cause the MAX
A/C to turn off.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation
button to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode if not recommended.
Recirculation mode may automatically adjust to
optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
The AUTO button automatically
controls the interior cabin temperature
by adjusting distribution and amount
of airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active
during AUTO operation to improve performance.
Performing this function will cause the system
to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes Ú page 73. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to
change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Performing
this function will cause the automatic climate
controls to change to manual mode, and the
following settings will occur:
The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs
on)
The rear blower is off
The air conditioning compressor is turned on
Both driver and passenger temperature
controls are set to HI
Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
The air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate
Control system will return to the previous
setting. MAX Defrost automatically turns off
after 20 minutes.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button on the
climate control touchscreen to access
the rear climate controls. The Rear
Climate indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Switches
These switches provide the driver and
passenger with independent temperature
control.
Push the driver’s or passenger’s side
toggle switch on the faceplate upward,
or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Push the driver’s or passenger’s side
toggle switch on the faceplate
downward, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature
and rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings with the driver temperature,
mode, and blower settings. Changing the front
passenger temperature or rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings while
in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
several blower speeds available. The speeds
can be selected using the blower control
buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower speed can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
the faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located next
to the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed through
the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Combine Modes
Dual Level Combination
Front Defrost and Panel Mode
Tri-Level Combination
Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch
Display Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Rear Controls
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone ATC system
allows for adjustment of the rear climate
controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the “Rear Climate” button on the
touchscreen to display the rear climate
controls. The control functions now operate
the rear system.
Press the “Front Climate” button on the
touchscreen to return to the front climate
controls.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the
left and right sides of the rear passenger zones
can be adjusted separately from the front or
rear ATC panel.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This feature
automatically controls the rear interior cabin
temperature by adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. Toggling this function will cause
the rear system to switch between manual
mode and automatic modes Ú page 73.
The driver or front passenger can
combine two or three of the modes
described below by selecting them
individually on their side of climate
control screen. Combine modes by
pressing each icon on the
touchscreen.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings. The LOCK
REAR indicator will illuminate when LOCK REAR
is on.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release to return to the
Front Climate Control Screen.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator will
illuminate when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature
and rear passenger temperature, mode, and
blower settings with the driver temperature,
mode, and blower settings. Changing the front
passenger temperature or rear passenger
temperature, mode, or blower settings while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
the amount of air forced through the
rear climate system. There are several
blower speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Use the small blower icon (or blower icon with
the downward arrow) to reduce the blower
setting, and the large blower icon (or blower
icon with the upward arrow) to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
The rear airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the
headliner outlets, the floor outlets or
both.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the
rear right side of the third row seats and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons
are located on rear of the front center console.
NOTE:
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the
left and right sides of the rear passenger zones
can be adjusted separately from the front or
rear ATC panel.
AUTO BUTTON
The AUTO button automatically
controls the interior cabin temperature
by adjusting distribution and amount
of airflow. Performing this function will cause
the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes Ú page 73.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the left and right side of
the rear seating area with independent
temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate
for warmer temperature settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate
for cooler temperature settings.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Use the blower button with the “down”
arrow to reduce the blower setting, and
the blower button with the “up” arrow
to increase the blower setting. The rear blower
setting is shown in the display.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push the rear mode button to adjust
airflow distribution. The rear mode
settings are shown in the rear display.
The rear airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the headliner
outlets, the floor outlets, or both.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on
the rear display is illuminated when
the rear controls are locked by the
front system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the Uconnect touchscreen will illuminate a lock
symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are then controlled from the front
Uconnect system.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Rear seat occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock
button is turned off.
The rear ATC is located on the rear of the front
center console.
Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on
the front Uconnect touchscreen a second
time to turn the Rear Temperature Lock icon
off in the rear display.
Push a rear blower button, adjust the
temperature using the rear up and down
arrows, and select a control mode to suit the
rear occupant’s needs.
ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button
on the rear climate control faceplate.
Once the desired temperature is shown on the
rear display, the ATC System will automatically
achieve and maintain that comfort level. When
the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel and the word “AUTO” will illuminate
in the front ATC display, along with two
temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automat-
ically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the
front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield.
Defrost mode must be manually selected to
clear the windshield and side glass.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
For more information, see Ú page 390.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 382.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Tempera-
ture Control system through an intake grille,
located in the right side trim panel behind the
third row seats. The heater outlets are located
in the right side trim panel, just behind the rear
doors. Do not block or place objects directly in
front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system cold overload causing dam-
age to the blower motor.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer
will activate. Exiting remote start will resume
its previous operation. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and oper-
ation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to (Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
the upper paddle release lever.
To open the lower storage compartment, pull
the lower paddle release lever.
Storage Compartment Release Levers
Lift upward on the larger of the release levers to
access the lower storage compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/
push” design. Push the chrome pad on the door
to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
1 — Upper Compartment Release Lever
2 — Lower Compartment Release Lever
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an
upper and a lower storage area.
Rear Center Console
To open the covered storage compartment, pull
the upper paddle release lever on the front of
the lid.
The storage compartment may also be lifted
forward. Pull the paddle release lever located
on the back of the console lid.
Rear Paddle Release Lever
When the second row seats are folded flat,
lifting the console forward provides a flat load
floor surface from the cargo area. There is also
access to the storage compartment from the
third row.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for the second row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill
trim panels, and the tops of the windows are
equipped with hooks that the sun screens
attach to when pulled up.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen
over the two hooks attached to the top of the
window.
Sun Screen Extended
1 — Console Cupholders
2 — Open Lower Storage Area
3 — Covered Storage Compartment
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console
cupholders or devices with cords routing
through upper storage area. Damage may
occur to upper console lid and device cables
when upper storage compartment is lifted
forward.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab
upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the
screen back into the base sill.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the
center stack of the instrument panel.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
will activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports, and when a phone device
is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
Connecting AUX Or The External USB
Device
Use a connection cable to connect an external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use a
auxiliary cable to connect a device to the
vehicle’s AUX port. Both are located below the
climate controls.
USB/AUX Ports
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it
will begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A USB ports can be
used at the same time.
NOTE:
If the device’s battery completely discharges, it
may not communicate with the Uconnect
system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the device connected to the USB port
may charge it to the required level.
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port (Standard USB)
3 — AUX Port
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Using This Feature
By using a USB cable to connect an external
device:
The device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system, providing the artist, track title,
and album information on the radio display.
The device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to play, and browse the contents of
the device.
The audio device battery charges when
plugged into the USB port.
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an
external device:
The audio device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system. The Uconnect
system will not display information related to
the artist, track title, and album information.
NOTE:
When using the AUX port, the external device
cannot be controlled using the radio buttons.
The device will not charge.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Second And Third Row USB Ports
The second row USB ports can be used to
charge an external device.
Center Console Rear USB Ports
In the third row, a set of two USB ports can be
used to charge a device. These ports are charge
only.
Third Row USB Ports
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/
RUN position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
1 — Charge Only Type C USB Port
2 — Charge Only Type A USB Port
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded
the fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the
instrument panel, below the climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the
right rear cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed
from battery powered to powered by ignition in
the ON/RUN position by switching the cargo
area power outlet fuse from F44B to F44A in the
rear power distribution center Ú page 344.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain video game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
E
QUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the
storage area below the climate controls. This
charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard
that allows wireless charging of your mobile
phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate
can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place,
and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for
a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected and is
charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign
object is detected.
NOTE:
All vehicle doors must be closed for the wire-
less charging pad to operate.
Using a phone case may interfere with wire-
less charging.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window controls, located on the
driver's door trim panel, operate the window
movement for all four power windows.
There is a single switch on the front passenger
door and rear passenger doors which operate
the windows for only that door.
Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position. Opening a vehicle
front door will cancel this feature.
The window controls will operate only when
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
The power windows may be operated from
outside of the vehicle by using the key fob.
For more information, see Ú page 17.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Automatic Window Features
Both the driver and front passenger windows,
and if equipped, both rear windows, may have
Auto-Down and Auto-Up operations.
Auto-Down Feature
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature,
push the window switch down to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature,
lift the window switch up to the second detent,
and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Front Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
Rear Doors
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Release the window switch, and within five
seconds, pull the window switch up again
for an additional two seconds.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
DUAL PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Opening And Closing The Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic
stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
stop position and a full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
The sunshade has two programmed positions:
half open and full open positions. When
operating the sunshade from the closed
position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be
actuated again to continue on to full open
position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at
half open position will first automatically close
the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward and
release it within one-half second, the sunshade
will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the switch
again from the half open position and the
sunshade will open to the full open position and
stop automatically.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
close automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunshade in a partially
open position.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward,
the sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch again and the sunshade will
open to the full open position.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed
position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade was not already open, it will
automatically open prior to the roof opening to
the vent position.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the
vehicle, move the safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
CLOSING THE HOOD
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate button on the key
fob or by pushing the electronic liftgate
release button.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button
twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
button located to the left of the electronic
liftgate release button to lock the liftgate and
doors.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
When you push the electronic liftgate release
button, either only the liftgate will unlock, or all
the doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending
on the selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either
front door trim panel or the key fob to lock
and unlock the liftgate.
The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock or
unlock the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by
pushing the electronic liftgate release button
and pulling upward in one fluid motion.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the
liftgate:
Manually by grabbing the liftgate closing
handle and pulling in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
Key fob
Hands-free (if equipped)
Liftgate close button in the cargo area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
button located to the left of the electronic
liftgate release button, will lock the vehicle only.
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate close button
located in the cargo area on the left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is
in motion, pushing the liftgate close button a
second time will reverse the liftgate operation.
Liftgate Close Button
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT
The maximum height that the liftgate will open
can be adjusted and saved so that the liftgate
will only open to the desired height. To set a
desired height, proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull
down on the liftgate to the desired height.
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button,
located on the left side trim panel inside the
cargo area, for three seconds. An audible
chime will be heard to let you know the
height has been saved.
To set the saved height setting to a new setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the
liftgate upward to its full open position.
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new
desired height and hold the liftgate close
button for three seconds until the audible
chime is heard.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by
accessing the service release feature in
the latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
Liftgate Service Release
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen.
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate
the lever and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activation, use a straight in and out kicking
motion under the vehicle activation zone in the
general location below the rear license plate.
The activation zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from
side to side. Do not move your foot sideways or
in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
NOTE:
The activation zone is the same for vehicles
equipped with or without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash
and the liftgate will open after approximately
one second, or close after approximately three
seconds. These settings can be enabled or
disabled through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle. If a valid
Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be
turned off during jacking, tire changing,
manual car wash, and vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be acti-
vated by any metallic object making a similar
in-and-out motion under the rear fascia/
bumper, such as cleaning using a metal
broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed/open
position, provided it meets sufficient resis-
tance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side
of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop. If this occurs,
the liftgate must be operated manually.
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F
(−24°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before opening
the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time (approximately one hour), the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure
drops with temperature, it may be necessary to
assist the props when opening the liftgate in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature
and stop the power operation or reverse its
direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the
left side of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found under the
storage lid. To access the lower storage, lift the
handle and raise the storage lid.
Lift Storage Lid Handle
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
sides, should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage
rack. The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg),
and should be uniformly distributed over the
luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer to order and install
Mopar® crossbars built specifically for this roof
rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity. Place one
crossbar in the forward position. Place the rear
crossbar in one of the two rear optional
positions based on the load being secured.
To move the crossbars, loosen the
attachments, located at the upper edge of each
crossbar, approximately eight turns using the
anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar®
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel
to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the
desired position, re-tighten with the wrench to
lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped),
you may experience interruption of satellite
radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, place the rear crossbar in the
forward of the two rear crossbar positions.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and
allow the child seat to come loose. A child
could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING!
2
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-
ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop-
erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars installed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the wind-
shield, such as wood panels or surfboards,
or loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
The use of Sport Mode is not recommended
when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry
a load.
CAUTION!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
NOTE:
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will
illuminate briefly for a bulb check when the igni-
tion is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats Ú page 338.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Default Instrument Cluster
NOTE:
Holding OK will also allow you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
Main Menu
Vehicle Info
Trip
Navigation — If Equipped
Off Road
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Audio
Stored Messages
Settings
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
1.
Up
Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu.
2. OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the in-
formation screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK but-
ton for one second to reset displayed/se-
lected features that can be reset.
3. MENU Button
Push the MENU button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
the Home Screen display. Push and hold the
OK button to enter edit mode.
4. Left Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to
the main menu from an info screen or sub-
menu item.
5. Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu.
6. Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button
to access the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item.
Display Options
Holding OK will also allow you to change your
display to Digital or Analog.
Digital theme will be the default theme
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds.
Press OK to reactivate
Speedometer must always be present
Relevant warning notifications and other
pop-up info will still be displayed in the main
screen area (In this case the speed moves to
the top)
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you
are able to select up to five tiles to display
information based on your needs.
Press the MENU button for the Home Screen
display
Menu Button
Navigate Left or Right to highlight
desired Tile
Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
selected submenu and press OK again to add
your selection to your tile view
The main menu options are Main Menu,
Vehicle Info, Navigation, Audio, and Off Road
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center portion of the cluster and consist of
multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display
will illuminate in black under normal condi-
tions, yellow for non critical warnings and red
for critical warnings
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are
submenus available, the position within the
submenus is shown here
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp,
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel
Economy, Current Fuel Economy and Time)
Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally
display the main menu or the screens of a
selected feature of the main menu. The main
display area also displays pop-up messages
that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then
returns to the previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it
remains active) and can be reviewed from
the “Messages” main menu item. Examples
of this message type are “Right Front Turn
Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or
until the condition that activated the
message is cleared. Examples of this
message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the
Remote Start feature. This message type is
displayed until the ignition is in the RUN
state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then
returns to the previous screen. An example of
this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Power Steering
Cruise Off
Cruise Ready
ACC Override
Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Service Tire Pressure System
Parking Brake Engaged
Brake Fluid Low
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Door Open
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light
Door Open
Doors Open
Liftgate Open
Hood Open
Shift Not Allowed
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
Service Transmission
Service Shifter
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided
into the white or yellow telltales area on the left,
and the green or red telltales area on the right.
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and
numeric display will update to show 100%.
If conditions are not met a pop-up message
of “To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is
reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Home Screen
Press the Menu button to display the Home
Screen.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to highlight the desired selection. Push
and release the OK button to select. Press the
up or down arrow button to select a
different screen within the selected category. If
the Menu button is pressed in this view, the
instrument cluster will return to the previously
displayed screen.
Home Screen Options
Main Menu
Speedometer
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Night Vision
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy
Gauge Summary
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Stop/Start
Trip
Trip Info
Navigation
Navigation Info
Off Road
Terrain Status — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics
Pitch & Roll
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Audio
Audio Info
Stored Messages
Messages
Settings
Screen Setup
Speed Warning
MAIN MENU
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Drive menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Speedometer menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the OK
button to toggle between Analog and Digital
speedometer.
Night Vision — If Equipped
While viewing the Speedometer menu
title, push and release the left or
right arrow button until the Night
Vision menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Arrow buttons and submenu
indicators disappear after five seconds of menu
navigation inactivity. Pedestrian/Animal icons
will be displayed in the top left location
Ú page 181.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
While viewing the Speedometer menu title,
push and release the left or right arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display. The
Driver Assist screen indicates the current status
of ACC, Active Lane Management and Active
Driving Assist/Assist+/Pilot. Push and release
the OK button again to change between
Zoomed In and Zoomed Out view (“Press OK to
Zoom In” will display when in Zoomed Out view/
“Press OK to Zoom Out” will display when in
Zoomed In view) Ú page 158.
VEHICLE INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the
information submenus.
Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Current Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range feature is not able to be reset
through the instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the
coolant.
Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission tempera-
ture.
Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current voltage level of the
battery.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life
Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the icon.
If one or more tires have low pressure,
“Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the
vehicle icon and the tire pressure values in
each corner of the icon with the pressure
value of the low tire are displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure
value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function,
and cannot be reset Ú page 253.
Stop/Start Status
Display current status of Stop/Start system.
TRIP
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button to select Trip A or
Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Navigation display title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
OFF ROAD
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road Menu title is
highlighted. Push the left or right arrow
button to scroll the submenus.
Terrain Status — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain Status
Air Suspension Status
Vehicle Dynamics
Wheel Articulation
Transfer Case Status — If Equipped
Steering Angle
Sway Bar Status — If Equipped
Axle Lock Status — If Equipped
Pitch And Roll
Vehicle Pitch
Vehicle Roll
TRAILER TOW — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Trailer Brake will display the following:
Output
Type
Gain
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. This menu will
display the audio source information, including
the Song name, Artist name, and audio source
with an accompanying graphic.
STORED MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the left
or right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
SETTINGS
Head-Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped
NOTE:
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button until the HUD Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter HUD.
Use the up or down arrow button to select
a setting, then push and release the OK button
to adjust the setting.
ON/OFF
HUD ON/OFF
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will
display on the windshield. When it is not
selected, no display on the windshield.
Content and Layout
Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion
Standard Mode
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD
image is split into thirds with the speed limit
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in
the center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the
right.
Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active
Lane Management, Active Driving Assist),
Gear
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Advanced Mode
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn navi-
gation, speed limit, driver assist function(s),
and current gear.
Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion
Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active
Lane Management, Active Driving Assist)
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active
Lane Management, Active Driving Assist),
Gear
Display Height
Brightness
NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 98.
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will
not display while in the Settings menu.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Settings feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Current Gear
On
Off
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Tachometer — Digital Theme Only
Show with Digital Theme
Hide with Digital Theme
Odometer
Show
Hide
Favorite Menus
Main Menu
Vehicle Info
Trip (Show/Hide)
Navigation (Show/Hide)
Off Road (Show/Hide)
Audio (Show/Hide)
Messages
Settings
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK
button to choose whether to show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Restore
Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 110.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips, and if the evaluation and driving
pattern of the vehicle did not help to identify
the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with the
Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If it
stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 143.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will either stay
on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is
safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 313.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light
will illuminate in red when an animal is
detected directly in the vehicle’s path,
near the headlights, and a collision is possible
Ú page 181.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning
Light will illuminate in red when a
pedestrian is detected directly in the
vehicle’s path, near the headlights, and a
collision is possible Ú page 181.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible,
and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon
as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to
normal levels.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt is unbuckled in the second row.
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position, and if a seat belt in the
second row is unbuckled, a light corresponding
to the specific seat will turn on in the upper right
portion of the instrument cluster display,
momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information. If a second row seat belt that was
buckled at the start of the trip is unbuckled, the
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Light will change from
the buckled to the unbuckled symbol, and a
chime will sound Ú page 258.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if
the driver or front passenger seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound Ú page 258.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Service Active Lane Management Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Active Lane Management system
is not operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Active Lane Management Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning
Light will be solid yellow when the
vehicle is approaching a lane marker.
The warning light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker Ú page 174.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light
will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will
remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 328.
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light
will illuminate in yellow when an
animal is approaching or is in the
vehicles path Ú page 181.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning
Light will illuminate in yellow when a
pedestrian is approaching or is in the
vehicles path Ú page 181.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is
not operating and needs service
Ú page 146.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service Ú page 250.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow pressure
loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Low range provides a greater gear reduction
ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 136.
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively
adjusting the ride height Ú page 139.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting Ú page 139.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle is automatically lowered from
ride height position downward for easy
entry and exit of the vehicle.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 1 setting Ú page 139.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 2 setting Ú page 139.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Auto HOLD! keeps your vehicle at a
complete stop without you having to
keep your food on the brake pedal. If a
fault is detected, it will be indicated by a yellow
‘HOLD!’ indicator light that will stay on as long
as the fault condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that FCW is off Ú page 250.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and the vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 146.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and the vehicle in front is not detected
Ú page 146.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a
complete stop without you having to
keep your food on the brake pedal.
Once engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will
appear in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 146.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 57.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management
indicator light illuminates solid green
when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 174.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
Night Vision Warning System status is
Active Ú page 181.
Park/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the park lights or headlights are turned
on Ú page 57.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat
belt has been buckled in the second
row. A telltale will display in the upper
right corner of the instrument cluster display to
correspond to the specific seating position once
the seat belt has been buckled Ú page 258.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode
is active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 144.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will
flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has
been turned on, but is not set
Ú page 146.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 146.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are
not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Continued)
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management
system is ON, but not armed, the
Active Lane Management indicator
light illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line Ú page 174.
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear
passenger seats are unoccupied, and
will illuminate in the upper right portion
of the instrument cluster display, momentarily
replacing the configurable corner information.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when
Selec-Speed Control is activated.
To activate Selec-Speed Control, assure the
vehicle is 4WD Low and push the button on the
Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward
the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the
lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
Night Vision Warning System status is
Suppressed Ú page 181.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
(Continued)
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 206.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
CAUTION!
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
WARNING!
3
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
121
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the
engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any
driving gear.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ON/RUN position
until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ON/RUN position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
may AutoPark Ú page 122.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ON/RUN, and START. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle and
use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster Ú page 95.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back-up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to the ON/RUN position. After
30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF auto-
matically, unless the driver turns the ignition
switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" procedure and
has not experienced an extended park
condition (i.e., parked for more than 30 days), it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. The starter
motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and brake
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 310.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the
engine oil dipstick tube.
5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the
injector harness.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits
of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur Ú page 329.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break-in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient
and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake
switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the Customer Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect
settings.
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
wheel (below the headlamp switch).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. You may hear a sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the
BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, however,
it can only be released when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN mode.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition is ON, the transmission is in
DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the
EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake disengages. You may also notice
a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always turn the
ignition OFF, secure the key fob, and lock
your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light
will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale
light flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
EPB system is required. Do not rely on the
parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the transmission is placed in
PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the customer
programmable features section of the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 222.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK.
SAFEHOLD
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system
that will place the transmission in PARK, and
engage the parking brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system. Be sure the
parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake will automatically engage if
all of the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch while the driver door is
open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to
the OFF position and back to ON again.
HOLD ‘N GO— IF EQUIPPED
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the
driver to remove their foot from the brake pedal
once the vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle
must be held at a standstill for a predetermined
amount of time by hydraulic braking. The EPB
will then engage and continue to hold the
vehicle at a stop until the driver applies the
accelerator pedal. Hold ‘N Go can be activated
or deactivated by pushing the HOLD button
located on the switch bank.
HOLD Switch
The following conditions must be met for Hold
‘N Go to activate:
Driver’s door closed
Driver's seat belt fastened
Vehicle is at a standstill
Forward gear is selected
ACC is not engaged
EPB is not applied
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto
parking maneuver is not activated
BRAKE MAINTENANCE MODE
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Maintenance Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
EPB system, this can only be done after
retracting the EPB actuator. Fortunately,
actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Maintenance Mode through
the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Maintenance Mode has requirements that must
be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
When brake maintenance work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING!
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to
the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position (even
though the engine will be off). Ensure that the
transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF
(not in the ON/RUN position) before exiting the
vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
simply rotate the gear selector. You must press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped
or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple
gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE),
simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R)
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE (D) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
(Continued)
The electronically controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. Pulling
the -/+ switches (on the steering wheel) while in
the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display
that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2,
3, etc. Some models will display both the
selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in AutoStick mode.
Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into
another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)(Continued)
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING!
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, rotate the shifter all
the way counterclockwise until the indicator
displays PARK.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK (P) if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear Ú page 134. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation
will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing see Ú page 198.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see
Ú page 316.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
AutoStick Shift Paddles
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, tap one of the shift
paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-)
shift paddle to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can
use the shift paddles, to manually shift the
transmission. Tapping the (-) shift paddle, will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear. Tapping the (+) shift paddle, will upshift
the transmission to the next highest gear.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NOTE:
The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled
(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Personal Settings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle pressed, will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, push and hold
the (+) shift paddle until "D" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. The engine, transmission, and steering
systems are all set to their SPORT settings.
Sport Mode will provide improved throttle
response and modified transmission shift
points for an enhanced driving experience, as
well as greater amount of steering feel. This
mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the SPORT ON button on the
instrument panel switch bank. When Sport
Mode has been activated an indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
The driveline is equipped with a Front Axle
Disconnect (FAD) for the one-speed and
two-speed driveline. The FAD operation is fully
automated and controlled by the Drivetrain
Control Module (DTCM). It does not require any
customer input to engage. The FAD is set to
connect, disconnect and provide 4WD function
based on certain set conditions detected by the
DTCM, including but not limited to the following:
Ambient temperature
Wipers
Selec-Terrain Mode selection
Wheel-slip detection
The FAD is actuated only in 4WD HI range and
stays connected for 4WD LOW.
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which enables on-demand
four-wheel drive with active torque
management. No driver interaction is required.
The Brake Traction Control (BTC) system, which
combines standard ABS and Traction Control,
provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping
to allow additional torque transfer to wheels
with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
mended Ú page 203.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II system comes equipped with
a customer-selectable electronically operated
on-demand transfer case with active torque
management in all driveable ranges. This
transfer case provides the following operating
range positions:
4WD HI
N (NEUTRAL)
4WD LOW
When additional tractive effort and torque are
required, the 4WD LOW position can be used.
The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the normal 4WD HI position at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect performance and function
of the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each four-wheel drive system mode
position, see the information below:
4WD HI
This is the default operating range for daily use.
N (NEUTRAL)
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle Ú page 198.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N), push and hold
the 4WD LOW button until the 4WD LOW
indicator light begins to flash in the instrument
cluster. When the shift is complete, the 4WD
LOW indicator light will remain on solid.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “For
4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans
in NEUTRAL (N) Push 4WD LOW” message will
flash from the instrument cluster display
Ú page 98.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position
or the engine running, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the 4WD LOW
button until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both
the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both
the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
to flash in the instrument cluster. When the shift
is complete, the 4WD LOW indicator light will
remain off.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met —
"4WD Shift Cancelled" or "4WD Shift
Aborted/ Retry Shift" message will be
displayed on the instrument cluster. To
re-attempt shift, put the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) and push and hold the 4WD
LOW button.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped;
however, difficulty may occur due to the
mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required
for clutch teeth alignment and shift comple-
tion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the
shift.
QUADRA-TRAC II SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear
axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The
ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no
driver input to operate. Under normal driving
conditions, the unit functions as a standard
axle, balancing torque evenly between left and
right wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels, the coupling will sense a
speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin
faster than the other, torque will automatically
transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to
the wheel that has traction. While the transfer
case and axle coupling differ in design, their
operation is similar.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Tap the toggle up or down to cycle through the
positions.
Selec-Terrain
1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Selec-Terrain consists of the following
positions:
ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available
in 4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with air suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction-based tuning with
improved steerability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obsta-
cles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle
level will change to Off-Road 2. If the
Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and
the transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW
to 4WD HI, the Selec-Terrain system will
return to AUTO.
SAND – Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension,
the default ride height for SAND is Normal
Ride Height (NRH).
MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to OR1.
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
in SNOW mode (depending on certain oper-
ating conditions), the transmission may use
SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If
equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off-road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and accelera-
tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
SPORT – This mode is only available in 4WD
HI, and alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of
available engine power. Suspension settings
are optimized and steering assist is modified
to provide better handling performance.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 98.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by a toggle
switch. The vehicle will automatically raise and
lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate
driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle
will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and
when operating in off-road modes, the vehicle
will raise the ride height accordingly. The
buttons near the terrain switch in the center
console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Quadra-Lift Switch
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Non-TrailHawk Raises the
vehicle approximately 2.4 inches (60 mm))
(TrailHawk Raises the vehicle approximately
3.0 inches (75 mm)) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the UP button twice from the
NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
height will be automatically lowered to OR1
Ú page 203.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.6 inches (40 mm)) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. Push the UP button once from
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is
below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1
position, if the vehicle speed remains between
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH
Ú
page 203.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) 0.0 inches (0 mm)
– This is the standard position of the suspen-
sion and is meant for normal driving.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
-0.8 inches (-21 mm) Front and -1.0 inches
(-25 mm) Rear) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the
vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h)
.
The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode
if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 30 mph (48 km/h). The vehicle will
enter Aero Mode, regardless of vehicle speed
if the vehicle is in SPORT mode.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately -1.8 inches (-46 mm) Front and
-2.0 inches (-50 mm) Rear) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
DOWN button twice from NRH while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
6 — Toggle Switch
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 20 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), the
Entry/Exit Mode change will be canceled. To
exit Entry/Exit Mode, push the UP button
twice while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the
vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect
Touchscreen Radio. If this feature is enabled,
the vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is
in PARK, the terrain switch is in AUTO, the
transfer case is in AUTO and the vehicle level
should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The
vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
suspension level is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle
is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module (ITM),
the lowering will be suppressed when the igni-
tion is switched OFF and the door is open to
prevent setting the alarm off. When towing, the
automatic Entry/Exit mode may be disabled
through Uconnect to prevent vehicle and trailer
movement when gear selector is moved to
PARK.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The
height can be changed from the default
Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons Ú page 138.
The system requires that the engine be running
for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
the doors must be closed. If a door is opened at
any time while the vehicle is lowering the
change will not be completed until the open
door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into
oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the
rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front
will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly;
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper
appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature
which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled Ú page 207.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 207.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the
air suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit
ride height Ú page 207. When towing, the
automatic Entry/Exit mode may be disabled
through Uconnect to prevent vehicle and trailer
movement when the gear selector is moved to
PARK.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air
suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable
the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with igni-
tion on.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting
allows you to only display suspension warnings
Ú page 207.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled Ú page 207.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio Ú page 207.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 98.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate
to show the current position of the vehicle.
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position
which the system is working to achieve. When
raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing
while raising, the highest flashing indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators
are flashing while lowering, the lowest solid
indicator lamp is the position the system is
working to achieve.
Toggle up once will move the suspension one
position higher from the current position,
assuming all conditions are met (i.e. ignition on,
speed below threshold, etc). Toggle up can be
pushed multiple times. Each toggle up will raise
the requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Toggle down once will move the suspension one
position lower from the current level, assuming
all conditions are met (i.e. ignition on, doors
closed, speed below threshold, etc). Toggle
down can be pushed multiple times. Each
toggle down will lower the requested level by
one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit
Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested
changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 1 through
5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR2.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 2 through
5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
3 through 5 will be illuminated when the
vehicle is in this position.
Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this posi-
tion.
Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit
Mode.
Transport Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through
5 will be illuminated. Customer driving will
disable Tire/Jack Mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps
3 through 5 will be illuminated. Customer
driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric power steering system experiences a
fault that prevents it from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System
Ú page 207.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the instrument
cluster display, this indicates the vehicle needs
to be taken to an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the electric
power steering system. Once driving conditions
are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
few moments until the icon and message turn
off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a
heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 98.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
achieved from previous Autostop.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the Autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 98.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 98.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system which will adjust
the vehicle speed up to the preset speed to
maintain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
Assist System (ADAS):
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used
when ACC is not enabled, and functions as
normal cruise control.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect
vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate
at a time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control
will be unavailable, and vice versa.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active
Driving Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control alone will not detect vehicles directly
ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected Ú page 395.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stationary vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Driving Assist Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current system settings for Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC), Active Lane Management (ALM),
and the Active Driving Assist (ADA) systems. The
information it displays depends on ACC, ALM,
and ADA system statuses.
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
buttons will display one of the following
messages in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC: XX mph
(km/h)”.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position
for approximately 10 minutes when
following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within
10 minutes, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
(If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off”.
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
When ESC Full Off mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) is used
without ACC enabled. To change between Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Fixed Speed
Cruise Control features, first turn off ACC by
pushing the ACC on/off button. Then, turn on
Fixed Speed Cruise Control by pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In
addition, the proximity warning does not
activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be
sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button or press the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC system.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system will adjust the vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 148.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a vehicle ahead, your
vehicle will resume motion, without any driver
interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than
two seconds, the system will hold brake pres-
sure for up to 10 minutes. If no driver action
is taken after the 10 minutes, the Electric
Park Brake will be applied and the ACC
system will cancel.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still (or the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph
(5 km/h), and the driver seat belt is
unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the
Electric Park Brake will be applied and the
ACC system will cancel.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g.
more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
the radar sensor realigned at an authorized
dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime
will sound when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at
times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “ACC Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g.
more than once on every trip) without any snow,
rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the wind-
shield and forward facing camera inspected at
an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no
vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
of the curve the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped
in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle
a stationary object as it did not previously
detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a
camera mounted on the windshield, as well as
map data when the vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, to detect recognizable road signs
such as:
Speed limits
School zones
No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the
road sign detected in the unit of measure-
ment (mph or km/h) selected within
Uconnect Settings or within the instrument
cluster display.
If no speed limit signs are detected, the
system will revert to the speed limit signs that
are stored in the Navigation system.
The system always checks the traffic signs
indicating the current speed limit signs. The
system is able to recognize and display up to
two different road signs in the instrument
cluster display. These road signs can be
found on the Driver Assist page.
ACTIVATION /DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled
within the Uconnect system through the
“Safety/Driver Assistance” menu. System ON is
signaled by road signs shown on the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign
will be displayed when the driver selects it in the
“HOME” screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation
that are available through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert
the driver when the current speed of the vehicle
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a
graphic in the instrument cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system
will alert the driver when the current speed of
the vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit by
showing a graphic in the instrument cluster
display, and by sounding an audible alert. The
audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the
visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle
is exceeding the speed limit.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system
will not show any traffic signs (unless selected
in the “HOME” screen, which will show detected
speed limit signs), and no alerts will be issued to
the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the
instrument cluster display, and can display any
combination of signs at one time (e.g. speed
limit, speed limit and supplemental info, and
“Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what
information is available.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
When a newly detected speed limit is higher
than the current speed limit, the display will
update along with an “up” arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
the current speed limit, the display will update
along with a “down” arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to
five seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed
along with a newly detected speed limit
indicating special circumstances the driver
should be aware of. Available supplemental
information includes:
School
Construction
Rain
Snow
Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed
when the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the
displayed speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the
speed limit sign on the instrument cluster
display will show a red outline to alert the driver.
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
Information (School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
CAUTION!
Functionality may be limited or the system
may not work if the sensor is obstructed.
The system may have limited operation or
not work at all in weather conditions such
as heavy rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong
light contrasts can influence the recogni-
tion capability of the sensor.
The area surrounding the sensor must not
be covered with stickers or any other
object.
Do not tamper or perform any operations in
the area of the windshield glass directly
surrounding the sensor.
Clean foreign matters such as bird drop-
pings, insects, snow or ice on the wind-
shield. Use specific detergents and clean
cloths to avoid scratching the windshield.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is
combined with the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system, and centers the vehicle in the
driving lane while traveling at speeds up to
90 mph (145 km/h).
Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as
long as the set distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will
also keep your vehicle centered between the
lane lines, and monitor for other vehicles in
adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot
Monitoring sensors.
ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to
monitor driver attentiveness. ADA requires the
driver’s hands on the steering wheel at all
times.
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST ON
O
R OFF
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Active Driving Assist system,
proceed as follows:
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off
button located on the right side of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel image
will display white in the instrument cluster
display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this
button will activate BOTH ACC and Active
Driving Assist systems.
WARNING!
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a con-
venience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road
traffic, weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead, position in the lane
compared to other vehicles, and brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist
system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in construction zones).
When entering a highway off ramp, when
driving on roads that are icy, snow covered,
or slippery.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
2. If ACC was active and engaged before
pushing the ADA on/off button, ACC will
remain engaged and ADA will become
enabled and then engaged (once all other
conditions are met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the
ADA on/off button, push the SET (+) button
or the SET (-) button and release when the
desired driving speed is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting
by pushing the Distance Increase or
Distance Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as
described in “System Engagement Conditions”
in the next section, the system will engage and
the steering wheel image in the display will
change to green.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering
wheel image, the “glow” effect of the instru-
ment cluster display will also change to green
when ADA is engaged.
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met after
enabling the Active Driving Assist system before
the system will engage:
System is turned on
ACC is engaged
Driver seat belt is buckled
Driver has hands on steering wheel
System detects visible lane markings
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph
(145 km/h)
Vehicle is centered in lane
Turn signal is not activated
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
Trailer is not connected
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the
following situations:
If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is
pushed again (ADA will turn off)
If the driver applies torque to the steering
wheel
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
system becomes active and is providing
warnings/braking
If the ACC system is deactivated
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph
(145 km/h)
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in
the blind spot zone on the same side the turn
signal is being applied)
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
If lane markings are no longer detected
If the system has detected driver inattentive-
ness, and has gone through all escalation
warnings after hands are no longer detected
on the steering wheel
NOTE:
ADA will not enable if the system detects a
trailer is connected to the vehicle.
Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off
button will turn the system off. All other deac-
tivation conditions will place the system back
into the “enabled” state with the steering
wheel indicator displayed in white until all
engagement conditions are met again.
When the system is deactivated, the system
status indicator lights will turn off, Active
Lane Management will return to its previous
state, and ACC will disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Active Driving Assist system status can
always be viewed in the instrument cluster
display, and status changes are shown by
changes in color of the system’s indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
previously described Ú page 158, the system
status indicator lights will change from green, to
yellow, to red, while the steering wheel icon on
the display moves up the screen to the center.
The following indicators will change in color as
warnings to the driver escalate:
Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
icon in the instrument cluster display)
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver attention is not returned, the system
will deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but
the system is not actively providing steering
to the vehicle.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
System is actively steering the vehicle and
the system detects driver is attentive.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Driver inattentiveness has been detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected,
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering
wheel and take control of the vehicle when the
system is deactivated.
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator
lights (green, yellow, and red), the system can
also issue a steering wheel vibration to
accompany these warnings. The vibration
warning (if enabled) will occur if the vehicle
crosses a lane marker, for example, when
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
driving on a tight curve. This feature can be
turned on or off within the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
SYSTEM OPERATION /LIMITATIONS
The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction equipment,
pedestrians, or animals
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
Turn your vehicle
Change lanes
React to cross traffic
The Active Driving Assist system may have
limited or reduced functionality when one of the
following conditions occur:
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward
facing camera is damaged, covered, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the
windshield replaced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and if equipped, the front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury or death:
Always remain alert and be ready to take
control of the vehicle in the event that the
Active Driving Assist system disables.
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel when the Active Driving Assist
system is activated.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehi-
cles and pay attention to traffic conditions.
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers) which
could interfere with the hand detection
sensors.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 168.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h). A display warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in
REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear
fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors
located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the
area in front and behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active
Park Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors
located in the rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows
the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
and the vehicle is stationary.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 98. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch
located on the switch back above the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the system state.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately two seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear
selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no
warning message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display a
pop-up. The pop-up will include up to two faults.
Possible fault messages are "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED.” The pop-up message will
display for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up
message for five seconds. After five seconds, a
vehicle graphic will be displayed with
"UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor
location depending on where the fault is
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle
using the parking sensors located in the front
and rear fascia/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if this feature is enabled within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and, when enabled, with visual
indications on the instrument panel display.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance
Warning volume/chime will match the Front
ParkSense volume and chime type.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side
Distance Warning volume/chime will match the
Rear ParkSense volume and chime type.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12–24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the
vehicle.
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
on when the system is sounding an audible
tone. An audible tone will only sound if a colli-
sion is possible.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a
short distance and if the vehicle speed is
between 0 and 7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The
system can be activated/deactivated via the
"Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If the
ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense Hard switch then the Side Distance
Warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance
Warning feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in
the case of a failure of the Side Distance
Warning system sensors. Free the bumpers of
any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system
is not available. The failed operation of the
system might be due to the insufficient voltage
from the battery or other failures on the
electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the electrical
system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the
performance of the Side Distance Warning
system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message
to appear in the instrument cluster display
will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer
may interfere with the correct operation of
the parking sensors. Before using the Park-
Sense system, it is recommended to remove
the removable tow hook ball assembly and
any attachments from the vehicle when it is
not used for towing operations.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side
(i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
above the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(7 km/h) during active steering guidance into
the parking space
Steering wheel is touched during active
steering guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch
is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within the maximum amount of
shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver
to complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated
Driver's door is closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the
vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE,
and an objected is detected, the system will
default to Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will
appear in the radio screen, and the driver will
need to select “Yes” or “No” for a Parallel Park
Exit maneuver. Any other conditions will result
in a default to a Parallel Parking maneuver.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
PARALLEL /PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, you can select between Parallel,
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit
maneuvers in the Uconnect system.
Choose Parking Maneuver Below
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendic-
ular (depending on the type of maneuver) to
other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a
full screen image in the Uconnect display. If
the driver shifts to REVERSE while searching
for a parking space, a camera image will
appear in the Uconnect display with a “Shift
To Drive” message.
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver
being performed).
Once active steering begins, a camera image
will display in the Uconnect display with
prompts that will display for the duration of the
maneuver.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
hands still removed from the steering wheel),
you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space
Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may then instruct the driver to wait
for steering to complete before then instructing
to check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
backward.
Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
while keeping hands off of the steering wheel
will be instructed to the driver while checking
the vehicle’s surroundings before completing
the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The
message “Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within eight shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense switch once. After selection, the
system activates and warns the driver on the
instrument panel display about the operations
that have to be carried out to perform the
maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the
direction that you want to perform the
maneuver. Use the right arrow indicator to
perform the maneuver to the right side and use
the left arrow indicator to perform the
maneuver to the left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go of
the steering wheel and use the brake or
accelerator pedals as instructed, while the
system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues
to carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on
the steering wheel during the exit maneuver
(touching or holding the steering wheel to
prevent its movement), the maneuver will be
interrupted.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly
be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles
or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the
system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system
uses a forward facing camera to detect lane
markings or road edges and to measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries. It also uses
the Blind Spot Monitoring sensors to detect
vehicles in adjacent lanes while your vehicle is
preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the
vehicle approaches the lane marker (no turn
signal applied), the Active Lane Management
system provides a visual warning in the
instrument cluster, as well as a steering assist
torque (if configured in Uconnect Settings), to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to drift out of
the lane, the system provides a flashing visual
warning through the instrument cluster display
as well as a haptic steering wheel vibration (if
configured in Uconnect Settings) when the
vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
The warning will be in the form of a vibration in
the steering wheel, and/or automatic steering
assistance to direct the vehicle back toward the
center of the lane.
When both lane markings are detected, and the
driver uses the turn signal to indicate a lane
change while the system detects another
vehicle in the Blind Spot Monitoring zone on
that side of the vehicle, the Active Lane
Management system provides a warning in the
form of steering assist and/or steering vibration
(depending on radio settings) to guide the
vehicle back to the center of the lane.
Depending on the type of warning selected, the
system will either guide the vehicle back to the
center of the lane, provide a vibration in the
steering wheel, or both.
NOTE:
For an event where the Active Lane Manage-
ment system is reacting to a target vehicle in
the adjacent lane, the Blind Spot Monitoring
indicator LED on the mirror will flash, and the
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
steering wheel torque will be greater than for a
normal lane departure (no vehicle in adjacent
lane).
The driver may manually override the steering
assist warning by applying force into the
steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the Active Lane
Management system provides a visual warning
in the instrument cluster, as well as a steering
assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings), to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to
drift out of the lane, the system provides a
flashing visual warning through the instrument
cluster display as well as a haptic steering
wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect
Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
Active Lane Management system will monitor if
the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel
and provides an audible and visual warning to
the driver if removed. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
O
N OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button
is located on the switch panel above
the Uconnect display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
Management button (LED turns off). A message
is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again
(LED turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain
the last system state on or off from the last igni-
tion cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
M
ESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will
indicate the current lane drift condition through
the instrument cluster display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not
been detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is on and only the left lane
marking has been detected, and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a vibration
and/or steering assist warning in the steering
wheel if a lane departure occurs, the left lane
line will be green.
When the system senses the lane line has
been approached (but not crossed), the left
lane line will change to solid yellow and the
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
system will provide a haptic steering wheel
vibration and/or steering assist torque (if
programmed in Uconnect Settings).
When the system senses the lane line is
being crossed, the left lane line will change to
flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates
with similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to green to indicate that both of the
lane markings have been detected. When
both lane markings have been detected, the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a vibration
and/or steering assist warning in the steering
wheel if a lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
When the system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left lane line turns solid yellow. At
this time, steering assist warning is applied
to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-
tion of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
When the system senses the lane line is
being crossed, the left lane line changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow (on/off). At this
time, vibration is applied to the steering
wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system oper-
ates with similar behavior for a right lane
departure.
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle
begins to depart the lane at the same time
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
detects another vehicle in the BSM zones,
the system will provide a haptic steering
wheel vibration and/or steering assist torque
(if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
S
TATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane
Management system are available within the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Selectable Warning Types:
Vibration Only
Steering Assist Only
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are
for the intensity of the vibration (high/med/
low), steering assist warning (hi/med/low), and
the warning zone sensitivity (early/medium/
late).
NOTE:
The system will not apply vibration and/or
steering assist to the steering wheel when-
ever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic
Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning,
etc.).
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be
forced on when the ALM system is enabled.
The ALM system will be suppressed when the
Active Driving Assist system (if equipped) is
engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on
the Uconnect display screen along with a
caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Activation Of The Backup Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 207.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Rear Camera Washer
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup camera and digital
rearview mirror cameras (if equipped) are also
washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed
is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the
view to the standard Backup Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Backup
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
VIEWING AT SPEED
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL
or DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can
be activated with the “Backup
Camera” button in the Controls menu. This
feature allows the customer to monitor the area
directly behind the vehicle (or trailer, if
equipped) for up to 10 seconds while driving. If
the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
“X” button on the touchscreen.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The TrailCam system allows you to you see an
on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
Uconnect display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TrailCam system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below
methods:
Press the “FWD Camera” button on the
controls screen.
Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button
on the apps menu.
Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off-Road
Pages.
Select “Auto Launch Off Road+” (if equipped)
under camera settings while the “Off Road+”
button is pushed.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the Backup Camera
view. The Backup Camera view can also be
activated by pressing the icon on the
TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam
view is active, the TrailCam image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button “X” to disable display of the TrailCam
view is pressed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TrailCam image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen
button “X”, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display of the camera image is made avail-
able ONLY when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless
of the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD
Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the
TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop when the
button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds
at a time while holding the button.
The Clean Camera system is not available
when windshield washing is in process.
NOTE:
Pressing the Clean Camera soft button will
also wash the Night Vision camera (if
equipped).
If the front window washer feature is acti-
vated, all of the front cameras on the vehicle
will be washed as well. The front camera
washers will not operate when the low
washer fluid warning is displayed.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam
view based on the steering wheel position.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The FamCam system consists of an interior
monitoring camera mounted on the headliner
that allows the driver to view cargo/passengers
in the rear interior of the vehicle through the
Uconnect screen.
To activate the feature, press the
“FamCam” button in the Controls tab
of the Vehicle menu. The FamCam
feature can also be accessed from the
App Drawer, or the status bar at the top of the
Uconnect display.
The display will show the entire view inside the
vehicle on the left side of the screen, and will
show a zoomed in view of the selected seat on
the right side of the screen.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat shown in the zoomed in
view, press a different seat location on the left
side of the display. The zoomed in view will then
show the new seat location. By default, the
second row driver’s side seat will be displayed
in the zoomed in view.
The display will appear in color in well-lit
conditions and will appear black and white in
low light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or clicks the “X”
on the screen, the view will close. Otherwise,
the FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat
in the zoomed in view on the right side of the
display will be retained. The next time the
feature is activated, the same seat will be
shown in the zoomed in view.
NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night
Vision Camera system which uses an infrared
camera to view the area ahead of the vehicle,
beyond the headlights, to detect people and
large animals when it is dark outside.
The system detects pedestrians or large
animals by measuring the temperature
difference between the object and the
surrounding area.
The thermal objects detected by the camera
can be displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Scroll to the Night Vision page in the
instrument cluster display menu Ú page 103 to
display the Night Vision screen.
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter
on the display while cold objects (e.g. traffic
signs) will appear darker.
NOTE:
Night Vision only shows objects of interest
that are warmer or colder than the surround-
ings.
Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control
brightness to make the image appear
brighter or dimmer.
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a
different menu in the instrument cluster
display.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will
appear around objects of interest. More than
one object of interest may be highlighted.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will
update in real time based upon the current
Night Vision assessment.
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are
Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
Animal Warning Telltale
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is
considered either Level 1 or Level 2.
Level 1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2
warnings are red. The colors are not
configurable.
Level 1 Warnings:
Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster
display
Yellow highlights around the detected pedes-
trian/animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target
is in or approaching the vehicle path
Level 2 Warnings:
Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
Red highlights around the detected pedes-
trian/animal
Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision
with the detected pedestrian/animal is
possible
The pedestrian/animal is directly in the
vehicle path, close to the headlight area
A video pop-up will display when there is a
target detected and the instrument cluster
display is not showing the Night Vision page
A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning
detection event
Only one telltale can be displayed at a time
based upon priority.
The priority order of the warnings from highest
to lowest is:
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
4. Animal Warning Level 1
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head-Up
Display (if equipped).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all
Level 2 warnings become Level 1 warnings.
You can enable or disable the warnings within
the Uconnect system Ú page 207.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians
and animals can still be detected by the system,
but there will be no warnings.
The Night Vision alert status telltale
will be gray when the warnings are
suppressed. The telltale will also turn
gray to indicate that the alerts are suppressed
due to environmental factors (e.g. daylight
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
(Continued)
(Continued)
hours, external temperature is greater than
86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in
REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are
active, the telltale will be green Ú page 108.
DETECTION RANGE
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall
or greater in the upright position. The system
can also detect animals that are four-legged
and 3 ft (1 m) tall or greater in the upright
position.
The detection distance for the system is
between 26 ft (8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from
the front of the vehicle.
The system may not be able to detect
pedestrians or animals in the following
situations:
Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection
range
Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
Pedestrian/animal does not reach the
minimum detection height
NOTE:
Other objects on the road that meet the height/
shape/temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of
pedestrians/animals may be detected and clas-
sified as targets.
WARNING!
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.
Never attempt to swerve around animals if
doing so would endanger you or other
drivers on the road.
Do not stare at the image while driving. You
could crash and you or others could be
injured.
The Night Vision system only provides alerts
to objects of interest and cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. The warnings are meant to direct
your attention to the detected objects, but
the Night Vision system does not automati-
cally brake the vehicle and may not provide
a warning with enough time to help avoid a
crash.
Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian
or large animal is detected by the system.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the
vehicle ahead; and, most importantly,
brake operation to ensure safe operation of
the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Night Vision can only detect pedestrians
and animals located within the range of the
infrared camera.
Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or
animals and highlight them if:
They are not in an upright position, for
example if they are sitting or lying down,
or if the pedestrian is riding a bicycle
The figure in the display appears incom-
plete, for example because the pedes-
trian or animal is partially behind a
vehicle
The pedestrian/animal is not directly
ahead in the coverage area
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
SERVICE THE NIGHT VISION SYSTEM
When service conditions are present, the
following fault messages may appear in the
instrument cluster display when the vehicle is
placed in the ON position.
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked"
appears in the instrument cluster display, make
sure the camera is clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other debris. The camera is located in the
upper fascia/bumper, inside the driver side
grille slot. Clean the camera using a soft wet
cloth or by pressing the Clean Camera soft
button in the Uconnect system. If the message
continues to appear after cycling the ignition,
see an authorized dealer.
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or
“Night Vision Unavailable Service Required"
appears in the instrument cluster display after
cycling the ignition, see an authorized dealer.
The camera must be properly aligned to work
correctly. If the camera needs adjustment, see
an authorized dealer. Do not attempt to adjust
the camera yourself.
NIGHT VISION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The Night Vision display is deactivated under
the following conditions:
Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
The headlights are off and the vehicle speed
is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
The Night Vision display warnings are
suppressed under the following conditions:
Daylight hours
Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
On steep hills
On tight curves of the road
If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked
by dirt, snow, ice, or other debris
In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog,
rain, snow, or other weather conditions
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the
system does not need service.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
Surround View Camera system that allows you
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and Top View of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or a different view
is selected through the touchscreen soft
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show
which doors are open. The image will be
displayed on the Uconnect display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate
and side mirrors.
The pedestrian/animal is part of a
group
The pedestrian is wearing certain types
of clothing
The pedestrian/animal is moving too
quickly through the field of view
The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain,
snow, or ice
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Press this button on the touchscreen
to enter the Surround View Camera
menu in the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
Rear View or Top View is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera
is selected by pressing the Surround View
Camera soft key located in the Controls menu
within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system
with Rear View or Front View in a split screen
display. There is integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding to the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
image may appear distorted.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel
outside image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of
the rear camera system. The Top View
will be disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top View of
the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of
the front camera system. The Top View
will be disabled when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key
will provide a full screen rear view with
Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected
through the Surround View Camera menu,
exiting out of the Rear View screen will return to
the Surround View Camera menu. If the Backup
Camera was manually activated through the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting
out of the display screen will return to the
Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the
following conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than
8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than
REVERSE and the “X” button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manu-
ally through Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Rear Camera Washer
When the rear window washer is activated by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
forward, the rear backup camera and digital
rearview mirror cameras (if equipped) are also
washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four
times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will
return the view to the standard Backup
Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Backup
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing near
the right outer edge of the fuel door near
the center to unlatch. Then use a finger to
rotate fuel door to full open.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may
prevent the fuel door from opening. If this
occurs, lightly push around the perimeter
of the fuel door to break the ice build-up.
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper
doors inside the pipe seal the system.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
doors while refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper doors to open.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door. Engage the fuel door latch by pushing
on the right outer edge near the center.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 188.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 188.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are used to
tow small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a weight-
distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of
your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-
carrying hitch, you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
(Continued)
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a
weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine run posi-
tion with all doors closed while attaching a
trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension
system.
2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect
to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, use the touchscreen radio
settings to enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/
Jack mode will be canceled and the
procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 5mph (8 km/h).
When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit
mode may be disabled through Uconnect to
prevent vehicle and trailer movement when
the gear selector is moved to PARK.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H2.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
WARNING!
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above Normal Ride Height [H1]).
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and
switch off Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the
truck returns to Normal Ride Height.
Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight-distributing hitch to confirm the
manufacturers’ recommendations have
been met.
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry
standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
Measurement
Example
Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 364. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lb
(1,769 kg).
Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package are limited to 3,500 lb (350 lb tongue weight).
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW
Maximum Trailer TW
(See Note)
3.6L RWD Light Duty Cooling 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L RWD 11,700 lb (5,307 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L AWD Light Duty Cooling 9,000 lb (4,082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L AWD 11,700 lb (5,307 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L AWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver. This cover is
located at the bottom center of the rear fascia/
bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
quarter turn counterclockwise and pull
bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward
(towards you) then downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or dealer-
installed options must be considered as part of
the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire
And Loading Information” placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
Scheduled Servicing Ú page 322. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK (P). For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING!
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 364.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic. If the vehicle is equipped
with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the automatic
Entry/Exit mode may be disabled through
Uconnect to prevent vehicle and trailer
movement when the gear selector is moved to
PARK.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N
(NEUTRAL)
Tow in forward direction
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport Mode before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck Ú page 139. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example,
engine will not run), tie-downs should be
fastened over the tires using specific straps
(not to the body). Failure to follow these
instructions may cause fault codes to be set
and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA -TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE WITHOUT 4WD LOW
R
ANGE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in
the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA –TRAC II WITH 4WD LOW
R
ANGE
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in
PARK (P) for recreational towing. The N
(NEUTRAL) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and
out of transfer case N (NEUTRAL) can take place
with the selector switch in any mode position.
Shifting Into Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into N
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to
be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the N (NEUTRAL)
indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the N
(NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode for a shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If
the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode,
the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
air suspension, the engine should be
started and left running for a minimum of
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for more than four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to N (NEUTRAL) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL”
message will appear in the instrument
cluster.
N (NEUTRAL) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N
(NEUTRAL) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N
(NEUTRAL) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
N (NEUTRAL), push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn
the ignition to the off mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to
be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (NEUTRAL) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the N
(NEUTRAL) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode for a shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If
the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode,
the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
switch) for more than four seconds.
N (NEUTRAL) Button
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns
off, release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After
the N (NEUTRAL) button has been released,
the transfer case will always shift to 4WD HI.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or
DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The
vehicle height should then be raised as required
by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the optimized height
based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The
vehicle height can be changed from the default
height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches Ú page 136.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range —
If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, of
water while crossing small rivers or streams. To
maintain optimal performance of your vehicle's
heating and ventilation system it is recom-
mended to switch the system into recirculation
mode during water fording. Be sure to avoid
lowering the vehicle in water, ensure that the
easy exit entry setting is turned off in Uconnect
settings.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD
LOW range locks front and rear drivelines
together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts.
Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, and
reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure
the fluids have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component
damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 136.
Only shift into a lower gear to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the
transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use FIRST gear and
4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R).
Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required
to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill.
Always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid
repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control use the following
procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
4
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5/
5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or Ú page 119.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the customer
programmable features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the
Settings tab on the top of the touchscreen. In
this menu, the Uconnect system allows you to
access all of the available programmable
features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The
“+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the
brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and
“Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+
This setting will determine the behavior when the Off-Road feature is
activated. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and
“Off Road Pages”.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to
“Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The
available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Barge-in
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in, which is a feature that will allow you
to interrupt the help message or system prompts by speaking, to be
turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings — If Equipped
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats
or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The
“Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using
Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Power Off
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of
the doors are opened.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 226.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
Setting Name Description
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
“Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text
messages. Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation.
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color
of the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and
“Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Show Main Category Bar Labels
This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on
or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+
This setting will determine the behavior when the Off-Road feature is
activated. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and
“Off-Road”.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen.
To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
This setting is located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on
or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic
sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed
limit has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”,
and “Visual + Chime”.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver of a lane departure and slightly turn the
steering wheel to avoid the departure. The available options are
“Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
Active Lane Management Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
Night Vision Video Warning
This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray
cluster indicator light on or off.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off.
Drowsy Driver Detection
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on
the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering Default. The available
options are “Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for
the standard effort steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort
steering experience.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the Paddle Shifters on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time when driving into a different time zone.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Phone/Bluetooth®
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will
increase the hours and minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours
and minutes.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”,
you can scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an
external audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The
available options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the
statement is completed by the system. The available options are “On”
and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help”
setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of
what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List
off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These
settings can change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Camera
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or
off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when
the vehicle is turned on and off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting Name Description
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Ambient Color Personalization
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights”
must be selected and “Headlight Illumination on Approach” must be
selected above 0 seconds for the feature to be enabled. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Proximity Wake-Up
Proximity Detection is a system which activates specific interior and
exterior lights as the vehicle is approached with a valid key fob. This
feature provides an increased sense of welcome and security as the user
enters the vehicle in the dark. This setting will turn the Proximity Wake-Up
on or off.
NOTE:
For the exterior lighting to be activated, Headlight Illumination On
Approach must be set to a value other than zero.
Greeting Lights
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight
Illumination On Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting
Lights” must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must
be selected above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large
or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light)
will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
Doors & Locks
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting
is selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No”.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising
or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close
the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
Key Off Options
When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the
engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The
“Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using
Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Suspension
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after
vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and
“10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the
Radio Off Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Windows With Key Fob
This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is
off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
Setting Name Description
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The
“Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist it changing a
spare tire.
Auxiliary Mode
This setting will allow you to set the auxiliary suspension mode. The
available options are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment
Mode”. In Transport Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when being
transported by another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment Mode, the vehicle will
not auto level when a wheel alignment is being performed.
Setting Name Description
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Notifications
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is
started. The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With
Recall Last, the system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut
off.
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the
Radio Off Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option
(Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and
38.
Setting Name Description
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of
any connected phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any
connected phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or
off.
Setting Name Description
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These
settings can be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings
This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the
SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Software Updates
Reset
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default
settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to
cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
3RD PARTY APPS
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd
party apps, which will further enhance your
Uconnect system.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that compliments
your Uconnect system’s media player. For the
app to be effective, there must be audio
playback in the Uconnect media player.
McIntosh can control the playback of audio as
well as display the output level decibel meters.
To launch the app, begin playing audio and
follow these steps:
1. Press the Apps button.
2. Press the “McIntosh” app.
McIntosh
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the
following when listening to music.
NOTE:
The seek feature will not work while using
Bluetooth®
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for
smartphone projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”.
The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
Setting Name Description
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
NOTE:
You cannot change the audio source within the app. To do so, press the Media button, and then press the Sources button.
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the Bottom Menu Bar.
For more information on the McIntosh app and its functionality, please visit https://www.mcintoshlabs.com.
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Repeat
Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn
off (works only with a USB device).
Change Channel Down
Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down.
While using AM/FM, pressing the channel down will change the
frequency by 0.2. Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Change Channel Up
Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While
using AM/FM, pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.2.
Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages, which provides the vehicle status while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
information relating to the vehicle ride height,
the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain
mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road
button on the touchscreen from the Vehicle
menu, and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
Off Road Pages Button
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Accessory Gauges
Pitch/Roll
Selec-Terrain
Suspension
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the five selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the
current status of the vehicle’s Coolant
Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure,
Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Vehicle Dynamics
2 — Steering Angle
3 — Front Axle Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must
be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
Sand/Mud
Snow
Auto — Default
Sport
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
Wheel Articulation
Current Ride Height Status
Off-Road 2
Off-Road 1
Normal
Aero
Entry/Exit
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride
Height is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on
the screen will switch to the appropriate height
and the Wheel Articulation will show the move-
ment and change in height.
Suspension Menu
1 — Wheel Articulation
2 — Current Ride Height
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The Remote Sound System controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the
next listenable station, and pushing the bottom
of the switch will seek down for the next
listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily improve from repositioning the
mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
5
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 395.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
237
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
DROWSY DRIVER DETECTION (DDD) —
I
F EQUIPPED
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued
and warns the driver to pull over and take a
break.
To Activate/Deactivate
DDD can be activated and deactivated through
the Uconnect system by selecting the following
in order:
1. “Driver Assistance”
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
System Intervention
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s
steering patterns, any buttons/switches that
are pressed, and from the front camera, the
system implements two operating logics:
The first operating logic takes the driving style
into account, observing the road and detecting
to what extent the driver can continue driving
with few lane crossing events.
The second operating logic measures the
time spent behind the wheel with the vehicle
speed above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below
110 mph (180 km/h).
NOTE:
If the conditions described above are not
detected continuously during the entire driving
period, the “Drowsy Driver” message may be
displayed later than two or three hours. If the
driving style indicates that the driver is unable
to follow the road trajectory and respect the
horizontal lane markings, the red symbol will
appear on the instrument cluster display to
suggest that the driver should stop for a break.
An audible signal will also sound.
If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by
the system by pushing the “OK” button on the
left side of the steering wheel, the message will
disappear from the display.
If the driver ignores the warning provided by the
system and does not stop, the message will
continue to remain on the display.
WARNING!
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of
driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue
while driving, pull over safely for a break
without waiting for the DDD to intervene. Only
return to the road when you are in the right
physical and mental condition to prevent
endangering yourself and other drivers.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
NOTE:
In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedi-
cated message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
DDD Warning Message
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in
the rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is
opened at the beginning of each key cycle. To
activate, the rear door must be open for more
than one second and the vehicle must be
placed in the ON/RUN position within
10 minutes. When the potential presence of an
object is determined and/or otherwise inferred,
a message will appear in the instrument cluster
display reminding driver to check the rear
seat(s) immediately after key off accompanied
by an alert upon exiting the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC
system. This system includes the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
and Traction Control System (TCS). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 240 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting
the above conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
(Continued)
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It should go out
with the engine running. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode, the ESC system will be on even if
it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road
driving while in 4WD Low. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section) has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with
throttle or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see Ú page 98 for further informa-
tion.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 207 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine power to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 189.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane in width on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side
of the vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles (greater
then 15 mph) that are outside the detection
zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in random false detections on the
trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal
is used Ú page 207.
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle
or any small object remains at the side of the
vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that
the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors. In
addition, when the turn signal is activated
during the alert on the side of the vehicle
corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime)
alert can be heard. During this audible (chime)
alert, the radio volume will be reduced
Ú page 249.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (Side, Rear,
Front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 395.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on (Blind Spot Lights Only or Blind
Spot Lights/Chimes) and the vehicle is in
REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing
the radio volume.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect system Ú page 207.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect a vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started, the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the
driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
(within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a limited braking to warn the driver when
it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/
h), the system may provide maximum braking to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 395.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles, such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If
the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system
will be automatically deactivated.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 207.
NOTE:
The default sensitivity of FCW is the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Warning & Braking”. This allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
using an audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than the
“Medium” setting. This provides the most
reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near”
setting allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
when the distance between the vehicle in the
front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and
“Medium” settings, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) Limited Service
Required” or “Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state.
If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, the instrument cluster
displays:
“AEB Unavailable Service Required”
AEB Unavailable Service Required indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) system which provides the driver
with audible warnings and visual warnings, in
the instrument cluster display. It may apply
limited automatic braking when it detects a
potential frontal collision with a pedestrian.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
(62 km/h), the system may provide maximum
braking to mitigate the potential collision with a
pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes. When the system
determines a collision with the pedestrian/
cyclist in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows
the system to warn you of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect
display in the Control settings Ú page 207.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can PEB detect every type of potential
collision with a pedestrian. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could
lead to serious injury or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
The system will not reset to the default setting
when the vehicle is restarted.
Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) —
If Equipped
ICA uses three front radar sensors located in
the front fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming
vehicles from the front or side when driving
through an intersection. When the system
determines that a collision is probable, the
driver will attempt to mitigate a possible
collision by decelerating the vehicle. The system
will also provide audible warnings and visual
warnings (shown in the instrument cluster). If
the driver determines acceleration is needed to
avoid a collision, when the accelerator is
pressed ICA will cancel.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold tire pressure Ú page 395.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
For information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 364.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above recommended cold tire pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased
to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
(Continued)
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure,
unless equipped with Tire Fill Alert.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warnings have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor.
CAUTION!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-
sures
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, and an
audible chime will be activated, when
one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) in a different color
Ú page 98.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light
off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
original color and the TPMS Warning Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s)
have been received. The system will
automatically update the graphic display of the
pressure value(s) and will return to its original
color. The TPMS Warning Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received in the case when the ignition is ON. In
the case when the ignition is OFF, the ignition on
the vehicle has to be turned ON and may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information for the
pressure value(s) to be updated.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “--“ in place
of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
NOTE:
Only vehicles equipped with a full size matching
spare (i.e., matching with a road wheel) come
with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor mounted in the spare tire. In either option
of having a full size spare equipped or not, the
tire pressure is not monitored or displayed on the
cluster for the corresponding spare tire location.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and the
instrument cluster display will still display a pres-
sure value in the different color graphic display
and an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster display will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value. For each subsequent igni-
tion switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace
the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated by replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if
the system is in deactivation mode (if
equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase in tire pressure while filling
the tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode with the transmission in PARK for
vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, the parking brake must
be applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard
lamps do not come on while inflating the tire,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor
may be in an inoperative position, preventing
the TPM sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved
slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overfilled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the
tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow you to select a pressure to
inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear
axle tires to, and to provide feedback while
inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application,
which is located in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system, you will be able to select a
pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure
range from ≥15 psi to XX in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values
for the front and rear axles as shown on the
vehicle placard pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect
system for the front and rear axle. Once you
select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you
can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK in vehicles
with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in
vehicles with a manual transmission. The
hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. If the hazard lamps do not
come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be
in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the
following STFA states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let you know when
to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is added or removed to reach proper
selected pressure level.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
(Continued)
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 280.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 280.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 392 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to
remind the driver and outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to
buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is
active whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. If your vehicle is involved
in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision
Care Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt
Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 289.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light
is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 108.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
(Continued)
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the
glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a
frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
(Continued)
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
(Continued)
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
(Continued)
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger)
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
The anchorages are under a flap with the
anchorage symbols on it. Pull the top of the flap
away from the seatback to access the lower
anchorages.
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles:
2nd Row Upper Tether Anchorage
Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(2nd Row Bench)
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Six Passenger Second Row Seating:
Seven Passenger Second Row Seating:
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
anchorages to install a child seat in the
center of the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see
Ú
page 288.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 289 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 291 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description on Ú page 265 for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 291 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 283 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Seating)
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
(Continued)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After
the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 258.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners.
DO NOT install your floor mat upside
down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
6
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
297
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the switch bank just above the radio screen.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 395.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built-in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
(Continued)
(Continued)
connected with the SOS operator until
the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspen-
sion system, there is a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled before
changing a tire. This feature can be activated
through the Uconnect system Ú page 141.
note:
Before changing a tire or using the jack please
disable the hands free lift gate, This feature can
be disabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 222.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, under the load
floor.
NOTE:
Jack Locations vary depending on vehicle trim
level
Load Floor Handle
Lift up on the load floor handle to access the
jack and tool storage.
Jack Storage Location (Without Air Suspension)
Jack Storage Location (With Air Suspension)
After lifting load floor, remove the jack storage
cover.
Jack Storage Cover Tabs
To remove, firmly press the two side tabs on the
jack storage cover and lift up.
Jack And Tools
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
Pull up on the jack and remove the Velcro straps
for use.
Jack Removal (Equipped With Air Suspension)
Jack Removal (Equipped Without Air Suspension)
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism.
To remove or stow the spare, use the jack
handle/lug wrench connected to the square
socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive”
nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Location
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack
up the vehicle. The spare tire is stowed
underneath the rear cargo area on the outside
of the vehicle.
1. Assemble the jacking tools.
Jack And Tools
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
1 — Jack Tool
2 — Lug Nut Wrench
3 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
4 — Jack Handle Extension
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Scissor Jack
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Locate and remove plug from the storage
compartment floor to expose the winch
access hole.
Winch Nut Plug
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the winch
drive nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
extension to completely lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the handle counterclockwise
until the winch stops.
Winch Drive Nut Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and
rotate it vertically behind the rear fascia/
bumper.
5. Pull the metal retainer toward you to
release it.
Spare Tire Retainer
6. Slide the retainer up the steel extension
tube and winch cable. Rotate the retainer
and push it through the hole in the wheel.
Releasing The Retainer
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them
counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel
is still on the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking loca-
tions are critical. See below images for proper
jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards.
Front Jacking Location
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the
proper engagement location on the inside of
the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur if
the procedure is not properly followed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque
Ú page 386. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
10. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve
through the road wheel.
Installing Winch
11. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the
rear fascia/bumper and exhaust system
heat shields. Raise the tire by turning the
lug wrench on the winch extension
clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times
to make sure the cable is tight.
Winch Wrench Rotation
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use
with the jack wrench extension tool only. Use
of air wrench or power tool may damage the
winch.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the
winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven
with the tire loose.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
13. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack
storage bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover
by firmly pushing down until the two side
clips lock into position.
14. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump st-arting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
driver's front seat. There are remote terminals
located under the hood to assist in jump
starting.
Jump Starting Posts
NOTE:
The remote battery posts are viewed by
standing on the right side of the vehicle looking
over the fender. The positive battery post may
be covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the
cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on
or around the post.
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, or either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located directly in front of
the underhood fuse box.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
Ú page 302 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into
the filler neck opening.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup.
Re-release the fuel door by pushing on the rear
outer edge near the center to unlatch. Do not
pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling:
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before activat-
ing the Manual Park Release. If possible, you
should apply the parking brake. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to
roll away if it is not secured or properly con-
nected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual
Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or
around the vehicle.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual
Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the
steering column.
NOTE:
Insert the flathead screwdriver or similar tool in
the lower notch of the access cover and gently
rotate clockwise.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Manual Park Release Location
4. Remove the orange lock plug by turning it a
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Locked — Unlocked Position
5. Pull the lock plug out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be
in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
moved.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion, the lock plug and tether will remain outside
of the trim panel and the access cover cannot
be reinstalled.
6. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the lock plug out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever
back to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully,
then firmly push the orange lock plug back
to the locking position within the housing.
Re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps
1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 240.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 198.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE
If Transmission Is Operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
Ú page 198
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
If Transmission Is Operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
(Continued)
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged,
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move
the vehicle Ú page 313.
REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
For instructions on shifting the transmission
to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 313.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
front wheels in the straight position) with the
rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. If vehicle is equipped
with Quadra-lift air suspension, secure
vehicle only with tire/wheel straps (no
suspension components or body) to
prevent air suspension from adjusting
during towing against securement straps
and causing damage. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
ALL WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK Ú page 198.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and
therefore must be towed will all four wheels OFF
the ground.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be two mounted on the front of the vehicle
and one in the rear. The rear tow hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may come equipped with a front
tow eye that can be used to move a disabled
vehicle.
When using a the tow eye, follow the
precautions below.
Tow Eye
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Tow Eye Warning Label
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside
emergencies. Use with an appropriate
device in accordance with highway code (a
rigid bar or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in
preparation for transport via a tow truck.
The tow eye must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are
obstacles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck
hookup or highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck
vehicle Ú page 315.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed Ú page 316.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tow Eye Installation
The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the passenger’s side of the fascia/
bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the
tow eye into the receptacle, making sure it is
fully tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front
fascia/bumper. If the tow eye is not securely
seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle
should not be moved.
Front Tow Eye Access Door
Front Tow Eye Installed
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the driver’s side of the rear fascia/
bumper.
To install the tow eye, open the door using the
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the
tow eye into the receptacle, making sure it is
fully tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front
fascia/bumper. If the tow eye is not securely
seated to the attaching bracket, the vehicle
should not be moved.
Rear Tow Eye Access Door
Rear Tow Eye Installed
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 278.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 279.
7
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,
000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
and pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is based on mileage for domestic and kilometers for international market, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Filter Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate
when the washer fluid level is low. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield
will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the
“WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment,
be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up
of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your
climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. Water will never have
to be added, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to Jump
Starting Procedure Ú page 310.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid Ú page 390.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 323.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Mopar® filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners
on the engine air cleaner filter cover.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if dirt
or debris is present before replacing the engine
air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 323.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. There is a glove compartment travel stop on
the right side of the glove compartment
door, partially close the glove compartment
door and pull the travel stop toward you to
release the glove compartment travel stop.
Glove Compartment
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
(Continued)
5. Squeeze the retaining tabs together that
secures the cabin air filter cover to the
HVAC housing. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage into the HVAC
housing.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the door hinge and reattach the tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
1 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
WARNING!
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to
separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grab the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your left hand.
With your right hand, hold the wiper arm as
you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop (far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm).
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
(Continued)
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
3. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO
Ú page 293.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 323.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants
Ú page 390.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 323.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure
to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid Ú page 391. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 391. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid Ú page 391.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lb (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid Ú page 391.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment, behind the headlamp. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 – – Spare
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 *Amp – Spare
F06 Shunt – Aux Battery Input
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #1
F09 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #2
F10 150 Amp Gray – Feed to IPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR Fuse*
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F12 – – Not Populated
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter #1 & #2
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM / VPMS*
F15 – 10 Amp Red MOD ECM*
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – – Not Populated
F18 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM Valves*
F20 – – Not Populated
F21 – – Not Populated
F22 – – Not Populated
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / EPS / SLM / GPF
F23B – 10 Amp Red IAIR SUSPENSION / ELSD RR
F24 – – Not Populated
F25 – – Not Populated
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor*
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
F28 – – Not Populated
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – – Not Populated
F31 – – Not Populated
F32 – – Not Populated
F33 – – Not Populated
F34 – – Not Populated
F35 – – Not Populated
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F38 – – Not Populated
F39 – – Not Populated
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor #1 (IBS #1)
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow Central ADAS Decision (CADM) MAP*
F42 – – Not Populated
F43 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM) Gas Engine
F44 – – Not Populated
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Front Axle Disconnect
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F46 – – Not Populated
F47 – – Not Populated
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F49 – – Not Populated
F50 – – Not Populated
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor / FPCM
F52 – – Not Populated
F53 – – Not Populated
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – – Not Populated
F56 – – Not Populated
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – – Not Populated
F59 – – Not Populated
F60 – – Not Populated
F61 – – Not Populated
F62 – – Not Populated
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Front
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
F64 – 15 Amp Blue Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS)
F65 – 15 Amp Blue
ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Grille Shutter Lower / ACT Rear Axle
Coolant Valve / Active Air Dam
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red
DTCM / Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS) Wake Up / Switchable
Engine Mount / BSM
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil / IGN Capacitors 3.6L
F71 – – Not Populated
F72 – – Not Populated
F73 – – Not Populated
F74 – – Not Populated
F75 – – Not Populated
F76 – – Not Populated
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F79 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door / MOD ELCM / Fuel Injectors* (5.7L Only)
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM (Gas)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F82 – – Not Populated
F83 40 Amp Green – LTR Coolant Pump* (6.2L)
F84 – – Not Populated
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR Relay Coil #1*
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Valves
F87 – – Not Populated
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #1
F89 – – Not Populated
F90 – – Not Populated
F91 – – Not Populated
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer (Windshield)
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 – 10 Amp Red AC Compressor Clutch / Electric AC Compressor
F95 – – Not Populated
F96 – – Not Populated
F97 – – Not Populated
F98A – – Not Populated
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
F98B – – Not Populated
F99A – – Not Populated
F99B – – Not Populated
F100A – – Not Populated
F100B – – Not Populated
F101 – – Not Populated
F102 – – Not Populated
F103 30 Amp Pink – Frt Wiper
F104A – 15 Amp Blue PECP — Low Temp Passive Pump
F104B – 15 Amp Blue AHP — High Temp Aux Pump / AHP Enable*
F105A – 15 Amp Blue BCP — Low Temp Active Pump
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump (Gas)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Power Distribution Center
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located underneath the passenger seat. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. The following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F03 – – Spare
F05
150 Amp Gray
Shunt
–
Underhood Battery Feed (Single Battery 5.7 Only)
Aux Battery Input (Dual Battery ESS Vehicle Only)
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – Mod BCM Feed #2
F12 – – Spare
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15A – 10 Amp Red Power Inverter Mod (PIM) - Redundant Main Pwr Supply*
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
F15B – 10 Amp Red
Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC Cntrl
Frt
F16 – – Spare
F17 40 Amp Green – Mod BCM Feed #3
F18 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module / ADAS E Stop
F19B – – Spare
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Media Hub #2 (RR) / #3 (LR)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Dump 3rd Row (LT & RT)*
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F29A – 10 Amp Red MOD ICS Switch Bank Rear (Frt Console)
F29B – – Spare
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – 10 Amp Red Port Pwr USB Console (USB CH Only) / Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F37 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F42A – – Spare
F42B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Entertainment Screens 1 (Res1) / (Res2) / Media Hub #2
RR Wake Up / Media Hub #3 lR Wake Up / APO Illumination /
2nd - 3rd Row Seat Switches-Illumination
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1*
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger
Mod (SSMP)*
F51 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAir Suspension (Valves)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT)*
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter
F56 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #2*
F57 – – Spare
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB
Console UBS (CH Only)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver)*
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) MID*
F70 – 15 Amp Blue Video Routing Module (VRM) / Port Power - USB IP (USB Ch Only)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan L2+ Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) - 2*
F75 – – Spare
F76 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD IAir Suspension
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS)*
F82 – 10 Amp Red SW Seat Heater (RR RT - RR LT)*
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver - Passenger SW*
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Interior Power Distribution Center
The Interior Power Distribution Center is located
underneath the steering column on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
breakers. Fuse numbers are labeled next to
each fuse cavity, fuse descriptions correspond
with the following chart.
Interior PDC Location
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof Dual Pane / MTR sunroof single Pane
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel)*
F04 – 10 Amp Red
Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC) / (SRT)
VCDM*
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – 15 Amp Blue
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column
Lock
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Charge Indicator / Charge Port Indicator (CPIM)*
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
F13 – 10 Amp Red
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Digital TV (DTV) - China - Japan /
Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1 Dual USB RR / Interior
Monitoring Camera
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 10 Amp Red
Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion Module /
Intrusion Sensor / Siren / Heads Up Display (HUD) / Digital TV
(DTV) China - Japan
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - After market
F22 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 15 Amp Blue
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux Switch
Bank Module (ASBM)
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Transfer case SW / Humidity Rain Light Sensor (HRLS) /
Suspension SW*
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
F40 – – Spare
F41A – 10 Amp Red MOD Occupant Class / Steering Column Lock
F41B – 10 Amp Red Spare
F42A – 10 Amp Red
Parktronics System MOD (PTS) / MOD Haptic Lane Feedback /
Trailer Tow Module
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control / Frt ERC Motor Ctrl / RR ERC Motor Ctrl
F43A – – Spare
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 – – Spare
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
F50A – 10 Amp Red
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / MOD Front Passenger Display
Module (FPDM) / MOD DCSD*
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Media HUB #1 Frt / Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless Charging
Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/Premium Only
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
NOTE:
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of
any LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE:
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of
any LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. P-Metric tires have
the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Tire Terminology And Definitions
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in Ú page 188.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer Ú page 188.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
NOTE:
The recommended pressures may be different
for the front and rear axles.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information Ú page 253.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 315.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information Ú page 374.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 374. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 196.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
4x2
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
LAREDO
Rear
P245/70R17
265/60R18
S Class
LIMITED
OVERLAND
265/60R18
265/50R20
SUMMIT
265/50R20
275/45R21XL
20” - S Class
21” - 12mm
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
4x4
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
LAREDO
Rear
P245/70R17
265/60R18
S ClassTRAILHAWK 265/60R18
LIMITED
OVERLAND
265/60R18
265/50R20
SUMMIT
265/50R20
275/45R21XL
20” - S Class
21” - 12mm
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
CAUTION!
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION!
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position
following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized
FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified
Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically
recommended for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and the manufac-
turer recommends Mopar® total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
8
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left
front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 387
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than
recommended octane can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89
octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for
optimum performance and fuel economy.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
9
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 389
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
9
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 23 Gallons 87.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11.6 Quarts 10.9 Liters
5.7L Engine 14.8 Quarts 14 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 391
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method , 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
We recommend you use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US
LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 393
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr
for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 395
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or
Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................386
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................333
Active Driving Assist System ..........................158
Active Lane Management
System
...............................113 , 116, 118, 174
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..... 114, 116, 146
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............339
Adding Fuel ....................................................187
Additives, Fuel ...............................................388
Adjust
Down ........................................................... 41
Forward ....................................................... 40
Rearward..................................................... 40
Up................................................................ 41
Air Bag ...........................................................109
Air Bag Operation ......................................269
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 267 , 270
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................274
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 278, 321
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................321
Front Air Bag .............................................270
If Deployment Occurs ................................277
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................274
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............279
Maintenance .............................................279
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 267
Side Air Bags ............................................ 274
Transporting Pets ..................................... 293
Air Bag Light......................................... 267 , 294
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter)
............................................... 330
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 331
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 331 , 332
Air Conditioner System ................................. 331
Air Conditioning ................................................67
Max .............................................................67
Rear.............................................................71
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................75 , 331
Air Conditioning System ...................................73
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................74
Air Filter ........................................................ 330
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 371
Alarm
Arm The System
................................... 24 , 25
Disarm The System .....................................25
Rearm The System ......................................25
Security Alarm .......................................... 112
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................24
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .........................................................11
Ambient Light
Multicolor .....................................................63
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 339 , 390
Disposal .................................................... 340
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 112 , 237
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 112
Apps .............................................................. 230
Arming System
Security Alarm
.............................................24
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 244
Audio Systems (Radio) ......................... 105 , 206
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................83
Auto Hold ............................................. 116 , 128
Automatic Folding Mirrors ................................52
Automatic Headlights .......................................59
Automatic High Beams .....................................58
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............73
Automatic Transmission .......................121 , 130
Adding Fluid .............................................. 343
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 343
Fluid Change ............................................. 343
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 342
Fluid Type ........................................ 343 , 391
Special Additives ...................................... 342
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
397
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode
...133
AutoPark ........................................................122
Autostick........................................................134
Operation ..................................................134
AUX Cord.......................................................... 78
Auxiliary Driving Systems ...............................246
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 79
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 79
Axle Fluid .......................................................391
B
Battery
................................................. 110 , 328
Charging System Light ...............................110
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 17
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 61
Belts, Seat .....................................................293
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................334
Bodywork .......................................................383
B-Pillar Location .............................................368
Brake Assist System ......................................239
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................239
Brake Fluid .......................................... 342 , 391
Brake System ...................................... 341 , 386
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................386
Fluid Check ...............................................342
Master Cylinder .........................................342
Parking ......................................................125
Warning Light ............................................109
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 130
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 364
Bulbs, Light ................................................... 295
C
Camera, Front ............................................... 179
Camera, Night Vision .................................... 181
Camera, Rear ....................................... 177 , 184
Camera, Rear Washer ................................... 177
Camera, Surround View ................................ 184
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 390
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
............................................... 326
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 340
Car Washes................................................... 383
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................... 295 , 296
Care And Maintenance ................................. 383
Cargo Area Storage ..........................................92
Cargo Compartment ........................................92
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................92
Cellular Phone .............................................. 235
Chains, Tire ................................................... 379
Charging
Wireless
.......................................................81
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 365
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)
.............................................. 119
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 293
Checks, Safety .............................................. 293
Child Restraint .............................................. 280
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 282
Child Seat Installation ............................... 290
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 288
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 281
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 286
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 283
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 281
Seating Positions ...................................... 283
Child Safety Locks ............................................30
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 388
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 378
Climate Control ................................................66
Automatic ....................................................67
Rear .............................................................70
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ........ 389
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 124
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 376
Contract, Service ........................................... 393
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 340
Cooling System ............................................. 338
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 339
Coolant Level ............................................ 341
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 390
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 340
11
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398
Drain, Flush, And Refill
..............................339
Inspection ....................................... 339 , 341
Points To Remember .................................341
Pressure Cap .............................................340
Radiator Cap .............................................340
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 339, 390
Corrosion Protection ......................................383
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................146
Cruise Light ......................................... 116 , 117
Customer Assistance .....................................392
Customer Programmable Features ................207
Cybersecurity .................................................206
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 58
Defroster, Windshield ....................................294
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 24
De-Icer, Windshield .......................................... 66
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................118
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ................................................327
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................316
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................340
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...388
Door Ajar........................................................110
Door Locks ............................................... 25 , 29
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .... 30
Doors ............................................................... 25
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 35
Driving .......................................................... 203
Tips........................................................... 203
Drowsiness Detected .................................... 238
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 239
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 237
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 240 , 245
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 125
Electric Power Steering ................................. 110
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........79
Electronic Park Brake ................................... 112
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) .............................. 112 , 113, 240
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 110
Emergency Braking ....................................... 252
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 312
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 315
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 297
Jacking ..................................................... 301
Jump Starting ........................................... 309
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 119
Engine........................................................... 326
Air Cleaner ................................................ 330
Block Heater ............................................. 124
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 125
Checking Oil Level .................................... 327
Compartment .................................. 326 , 327
Compartment Identification ............. 326, 327
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 110
Cooling...................................................... 338
Exhaust Gas Caution .......................295 , 296
Fails To Start ............................................. 124
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 124
Fuel Requirements .......................... 387 , 390
Jump Starting ........................................... 309
Oil ....................................................329 , 390
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 326
Oil Filter .................................................... 330
Oil Selection..................................... 329 , 390
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 330
Oil Temperature ........................................ 111
Overheating .............................................. 313
Starting ............................................121 , 122
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 278 , 321
Ethanol.......................................................... 388
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........................295 , 296
Exhaust System ...................................295 , 337
Extend, Seats ...................................................41
Exterior Lights ............................... 57 , 295, 364
F
FamCam System
........................................... 181
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 330
Air Conditioning ........................ 75 , 331, 332
Engine Oil ................................................. 330
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 330
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
399
Flashers
.........................................................297
Hazard Warning .........................................297
Turn Signals .................................... 117 , 295
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 59
Flooded Engine Starting ................................124
Fluid Capacities .............................................390
Fluid Leaks ....................................................295
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................342
Engine Oil ..................................................327
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................391
Fog Lights ...............................................61 , 116
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 35
Forward Collision Warning .......... 114, 116, 250
Four Wheel Drive ...............114, 115, 136, 138
Operation ..................................................136
Shifting ......................................................115
System ......................................................136
Four Wheel Drive Operation ...........................136
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................297
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................315
Front And Rear ParkSense System ................161
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................343
Front View Camera ........................................179
Fuel ...............................................................387
Additives ...................................................388
Clean Air ....................................................388
Ethanol ......................................................388
Gasoline ....................................................387
Materials Added ........................................388
Methanol .................................................. 388
Octane Rating ........................................... 387
Requirements .................................. 387 , 390
Specifications ........................................... 390
Tank Capacity ........................................... 390
Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 143
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 389
Fueling .......................................................... 187
Fuses ............................................................ 344
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................52
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 387
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 388
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 388
Gear Ranges ................................................. 131
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 385
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 190
Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 190
Gross Trailer Weight ..................................... 190
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 190
GVWR............................................................ 188
H
Hands-Free Liftgate
.........................................91
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 297
Head Restraints ...............................................46
Headlights .......................................................57
Automatic ....................................................59
Cleaning ................................................... 383
Delay ...........................................................60
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........58
Leveling .......................................................61
Lights On Reminder .....................................60
On With Wipers ............................................59
Passing ........................................................59
Switch ..........................................................57
Heated Mirrors .................................................52
Heated Seats ...................................................44
Heated Steering Wheel ....................................31
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 124
High Beam .................................................... 118
Hill Descent Control .............................117 , 242
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 242
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 244
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 192
Hold ’N Go ..................................................... 128
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................52
Hood
Closing
...................................................... 111
Opening .................................................... 111
Hood Release ...................................................88
I
Ignition .............................................................20
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ......................20
Key Fob Not Detected ..................................20
Keyless Ignition ...........................................20
Keyless Push Button ....................................20
11
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400
Push Button Ignition
.................................... 20
Switch ......................................................... 20
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................130
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 19
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................49 , 297
Instrument Cluster .................................... 95 , 97
Audio .........................................................105
Descriptions ..............................................117
Display ........................................................ 98
Display And Messages ..............................100
Drive..........................................................103
Home ........................................................102
Menu Items ...............................................102
Navigation .................................................104
Off Road ....................................................104
Settings .....................................................105
Trip ............................................................104
Vehicle Info ...............................................103
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................385
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 62
Interior Appearance Care ...............................384
Interior Lights .................................................. 62
Interior Monitoring Camera ...........................181
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................64
Intersection Collision Assist ...........................253
Inverter
Power .......................................................... 81
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...................................78
J
Jack Location ................................................ 302
Jack Operation .............................................. 305
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ........ 301
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 305
Jump Starting ............................................... 309
K
Key Fob
Arm The System ..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................17
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................19
Keyless Enter-N-Go ....................................... 121
Passive Entry ...............................................27
Passive Entry Programming .........................27
Keys.................................................................16
Replacement ...............................................19
Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................19
L
Lane Change Assist
.........................................61
Lane Management System ........................... 174
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 260
Latches ......................................................... 295
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 387
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 295
Life Of Tires ................................................... 374
Liftgate................................................... 89 , 111
Adjustable Height ........................................90
Closing .........................................................90
Hands-Free ..................................................91
Opening .......................................................89
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................66
Light Bulbs .................................................... 295
Lights ............................................................ 295
4WD Low .................................................. 115
Active Lane Management .......113, 116, 118
Adaptive Cruise Control ................... 116 , 117
Air Bag ....................................109 , 267, 294
Air Suspension Active ............................... 115
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height ......... 115
Air Suspension EntryExit ........................... 116
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 ........................ 116
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 ........................ 116
Ambient .......................................................62
Ambient, Mutlicolor ......................................63
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 112
Auto HOLD ................................................ 116
Auto HOLD Fault ....................................... 116
Automatic Headlights ..................................59
Battery Charge .......................................... 110
Blue .......................................................... 118
Brake Assist Warning ................................ 242
Brake Warning .......................................... 109
Bulb Replacement .................................... 364
Cruise ..............................................116 , 117
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
401
Daytime Running
......................................... 58
Dimmer Switch ............................................ 62
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 57
Door Open .................................................110
Electric Power Steering .............................110
Electronic Park Brake ................................112
Electronic Stability Control .............. 112 , 113
Electronic Throttle Control .........................110
Engine Coolant Temperature .....................110
Exterior ...............................................57 , 295
Fog .....................................................61 , 116
Forward Collision Warning .........................116
Gray...........................................................118
Green ........................................................116
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................297
Headlights On With Wipers .......................... 59
High Beam ................................................118
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 58
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......... 117 , 242
Hood Open ................................................111
Interior ........................................................62
Liftgate Open .............................................111
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 60
Low Fuel ....................................................113
Low Washer Fluid ......................................113
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......113
NEUTRAL ...................................................116
Night Vision Active .....................................117
Night Vision Suppressed ...........................118
Oil Pressure ...............................................111
Oil Temperature ........................................ 111
Park ....................................................59 , 117
Passing ........................................................59
Reading .......................................................62
Rear Seat Belt Reminder ................. 111 , 117
Rear Seat Unoccupied .............................. 118
Red........................................................... 109
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 111
Security Alarm .......................................... 112
SelecSpeed Control .................................. 118
Service ..................................................... 364
Service 4WD ............................................. 114
Service Adaptive Cruise ............................ 114
Service Forward Collision ......................... 114
Service StopStart System ......................... 114
Sport Mode ............................................... 117
StopStart .................................................. 117
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .............. 114
Traction Control ........................................ 242
Transmission Temperature ....................... 111
Turn Signals ............................. 61 , 117, 295
Vanity Mirror ................................................50
White ........................................................ 117
Yellow .............................................. 112 , 115
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 107
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 107
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 107
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 107
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 188
Tires ......................................................... 368
Locks
Child Protection ...........................................30
Manual ........................................................25
Power Door ..................................................26
Low Fuel........................................................ 113
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 334
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 386
Luggage Carrier ................................................93
M
Maintenance
.............................................86 , 88
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 328
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 322
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
................................................. 113 , 119
Manual
Park Release
............................................ 313
Service...................................................... 394
Massage
Seats
...........................................................43
McIntosh ....................................................... 230
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................33
Memory Seat ....................................................33
Memory Seats And Radio .................................33
Methanol....................................................... 388
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline
...................... 389
Mirrors .............................................................49
Automatic Dimming Rearview ......................49
Digital Rearview ...........................................49
11
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402
Exterior Folding
........................................... 51
Heated ........................................................ 52
Outside........................................................ 50
Power .......................................................... 51
Power Folding .............................................. 51
Rearview ............................................49 , 297
Tilt Side Mirrors ........................................... 52
Vanity .......................................................... 50
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................253
Mopar Parts ...................................................394
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 58
N
Navigation .....................................................104
Neutral ..........................................................116
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........................125
Night Vision ......................................... 117 , 118
Night Vision Camera ......................................181
O
Occupant Restraints ......................................258
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ......................387
Off Road Pages ..............................................232
Accessory Gauges .....................................233
Pitch And Roll ............................................233
Selec Terrain .............................................234
Status Bar .................................................232
Suspension ...............................................234
Vehicle Dynamics ..................................... 233
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 104
Oil Change Indicator ..................................... 101
Reset ........................................................ 101
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 330
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 330
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 111
Oil, Engine..................................................... 329
Capacity.................................................... 390
Checking................................................... 327
Dipstick .................................................... 327
Disposal ................................................... 330
Filter ......................................................... 330
Filter Disposal ........................................... 330
Identification Logo .................................... 330
Materials Added To .................................. 330
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 111
Recommendation ............................ 329 , 390
Synthetic .................................................. 330
Viscosity ................................................... 390
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 118
Operating Precautions .................................. 118
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................ 394
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................50
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 313
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 383
Parking Brake ............................................... 125
ParkSense
Front And Rear .......................................... 161
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 169
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 161
Passive Entry....................................................27
Pedestrian Warning System .......................... 252
Pets............................................................... 293
Pinch Protection ........................................85 , 88
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 368
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 386
Distribution Center (Fuses) .....345, 352, 358
Door Locks...................................................26
Inverter ........................................................81
Mirrors .........................................................51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................79
Seats ...........................................................40
Steering .................................................... 143
Sunroof .................................................84 , 86
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................31
Windows ......................................................82
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................41
Forward .......................................................40
Rearward .....................................................40
Up ................................................................41
Power Seats, Third Row ...................................42
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 264
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 301
Pressure Washing ......................................... 329
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
403
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
..................................................265
Profile ............................................................208
Programmable Features ................................207
Q
Quadra-Lift
.................................. 115 , 116, 139
Quadra-Trac ...................................................136
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................372
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............340
Radio
Off Road Pages
.........................................232
Settings .....................................................207
Sound Setting ............................................226
Radio Operation ............................................235
Radio Remote Controls ..................................235
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 65
Rear Air Conditioning ....................................... 71
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................343
Rear Camera ....................................... 177 , 184
Rear Camera, Washer ...................................177
Rear Cross Path .............................................249
Rear ParkSense System ................................161
Rear Seat Reminder ......................................239
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................66
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 36
Recreational Towing ......................................198
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................388
Refrigerant .................................................... 332
Release, Hood .................................................88
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 260
Remote Control
Starting System
...........................................21
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................16
Arm The Alarm .............................................24
Disarm The Alarm ........................................25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 235
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................23
Remote Starting System ..................................21
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 364
Replacement Keys ...........................................19
Replacement Tires ........................................ 374
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 394
Restraints, Child ........................................... 280
Restraints, Head ..............................................46
Roll Over Warning ............................................10
Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................93
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 381
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
........................ 293
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 295
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 394
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 364
Safety Tips .................................................... 293
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 295
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 322
Seat Belts ............................................ 259 , 293
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 263
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 263
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 263
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 265
Child Restraints ........................................ 280
Energy Management Feature ................... 265
Extender ................................................... 264
Front Seat ...............................259 , 260, 262
Inspection ................................................. 293
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 262
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 263
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 260
Operating Instructions .............................. 262
Pregnant Women ...................................... 264
Pretensioners ........................................... 265
Rear Seat.................................................. 260
Reminder ...................... 111 , 117, 118, 260
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 264
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 265
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 118
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 263
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 384
Seats..................................................35 , 40, 44
Adjustment ...........................................35 , 40
Bolster Adjustment ......................................41
Easy Entry ....................................................42
Extend .........................................................41
11
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404
Heated
........................................................44
Massage...................................................... 43
Memory ....................................................... 33
Rear Folding ................................................ 35
Reclining ..................................................... 36
Seatback Release ....................................... 35
Tilting .......................................................... 35
Vented......................................................... 45
Ventilated .................................................... 45
Second Row USB ............................................. 79
Security Alarm ........................................24 , 112
Arm The System .......................................... 24
Disarm The System ..................................... 25
Selec-Speed Control ......................................118
Selec-Terrain .................................................138
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 19
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 19
Service Assistance .........................................392
Service Contract ............................................393
Service Manuals ............................................394
Settings ............................................... 105 , 207
Shift Paddles .................................................134
Shifting ..........................................................129
Automatic Transmission .................. 129 , 130
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) ..............................200
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) ..........................202
Shoulder Belts ...............................................260
Side Distance Warning ..................................167
Signals, Turn ........................................ 117 , 295
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................379
Snow Tires .................................................... 376
Spare Tires .................................303 , 376, 377
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 150
Sport Mode ................................................... 135
Starting ......................................... 21 , 121, 122
Button .........................................................20
Cold Weather ............................................ 124
Engine Block Heater ................................. 124
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 124
Remote........................................................21
Starting And Operating ......................... 121 , 122
Starting Procedures ............................. 121 , 122
Steering ...........................................................30
Power ....................................................... 143
Tilt Column ...........................................30 , 31
Wheel, Heated .............................................31
Wheel, Tilt.............................................30 , 31
Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................32
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 235
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ........................................................ 235
Stop/Start ...................................114 , 117, 144
Storage ............................................................76
Cargo Area ...................................................92
Storage, Vehicle ............................................ 382
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 382
Sun Roof ............................................84 , 86, 88
Opening .......................................................85
Venting .................................................85 , 88
Sun Visor..........................................................50
Sunglasses Storage .........................................76
Sunshade Operation ..........................77 , 86, 87
Surround View Camera ................................. 184
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 245
Symbol Glossary ...............................................11
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 330
System, Remote Starting .................................21
T
Telescoping Steering Column
....................30 , 31
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............73
Third Party Apps ............................................ 230
Third Row USB .................................................79
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................92
Tilt Steering Column ..................................30 , 31
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 368
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .................... 366
Tire Markings ................................................ 364
Tire Safety Information .................................. 364
Tire Terminology And Definitions ................... 367
Tires .................................. 295 , 371, 376, 381
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 374
Air Pressure .............................................. 371
Chains ...................................................... 379
Changing .................................................. 301
Compact Spare ......................................... 376
General Information ........................ 371 , 376
High Speed ............................................... 372
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 371
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
405
Life Of Tires
...............................................374
Load Capacity ............................................368
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................ 114 , 253
Quality Grading ..........................................381
Radial ........................................................372
Replacement .............................................374
Rotation ....................................................381
Run Flat.....................................................373
Safety .............................................. 364 , 371
Sizes..........................................................365
Snow Tires .................................................376
Spare Tires ............................. 303 , 376, 377
Spinning ....................................................373
Trailer Towing ............................................196
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................374
Types.........................................................375
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................386
To Open Hood .................................................. 88
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 190, 194
Towing ................................................. 189 , 316
Disabled Vehicle ........................................316
Guide.........................................................193
Recreational ..............................................198
Weight .......................................................193
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................198
Towing Eyes ...................................................319
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle .......................................................... 198
Traction Control ............................................ 245
Traffic Sign Assist System ............................. 156
TrailCam System ........................................... 179
Trailer Frontal Area ....................................... 190
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 190 , 245
Trailer Towing ............................................... 189
Hitch Cover Removal ................................ 194
Hitches ..................................................... 192
Minimum Requirements ........................... 195
Tips........................................................... 198
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 194
Weight-Carrying Hitch ............................... 190
Weight-Distributing Hitch .......................... 191
Wiring ....................................................... 197
Trailer Weight ................................................ 193
Transfer Case ............................................... 344
Fluid ......................................................... 391
Maintenance ............................................ 344
Transmission ................................................ 130
Automatic ........................................ 130 , 342
Fluid ......................................................... 391
Maintenance ............................................ 342
Shifting ..................................................... 129
Temperature ............................................. 111
Transporting Pets .......................................... 293
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 374
Trip Computer ............................................... 104
Turn Signals .................................................. 117
U
Uconnect (Radio)
.......................................... 206
Uconnect 5/5 NAV ........................................ 206
Uconnect Settings ......................................... 207
Customer Programmable Features .......27, 29
Passive Entry Programming ..................27, 29
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 381
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 387
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................... 263
USB
Second Row .................................................79
Third Row.....................................................79
USB Port...........................................................78
V
Vanity Mirrors
...................................................50
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 386
Vehicle Loading .................................... 188 , 368
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 329
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................24
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 207
Vehicle Storage ............................................. 382
Voice Command ...............................................32
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................32
11
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard
.............................297
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) .................................................108
Warning Lights And Messages .......................108
Warnings, Roll Over ......................................... 10
Warranty Information .....................................394
Washers, Windshield .....................63 , 113, 328
Washing Vehicle ............................................383
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 378
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 378
Wind Buffeting .................................................84
Window Fogging ...............................................74
Window Lockout Switch ...................................84
Windows ..........................................................82
Power ..........................................................82
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................83
Windshield Defroster .................................... 294
Windshield DeIcer ............................................66
Windshield Washers .............................. 64 , 328
Fluid.......................................................... 328
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 334
Windshield Wipers ...........................................63
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 334
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................64
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................65
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................81
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right
to make changes in design and specifications, andor make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used
in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
NavigationUconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
21_WL_OM_EN_USC
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
